Revision 1.25

Operation Manual

SR865

2 MHz DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Certification

Stanford Research Systems certifies that this product met its published specifications at 

the time of shipment.

Warranty

This Stanford Research Systems product is warranted against defects in materials and 

workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment.

Service

For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a Stanford Research 

Systems authorized service facility. Contact Stanford Research Systems or an authorized 

representative before returning this product for repair.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice.

Copyright © Stanford Research Systems, Inc., 2015. All rights reserved.

Stanford Research Systems, Inc.

1290-C Reamwood Avenue

Sunnyvale, California 94089

www.thinkSRS.com

Printed in U.S.A. Document number 9-01707-903

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety and Preparation For Use i

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Safety and Preparation for Use

Warning

Dangerous voltages, capable of causing injury or death, are present 

in this instrument. Use extreme caution whenever the instrument 

covers are removed. Do not remove the covers while the unit is 

plugged into a live outlet.

Line Voltage Selection

Caution

This instrument may be damaged if operated with the LINE VOLTAGE SELECTOR set 

for the wrong ac line voltage or if the wrong fuse is installed.

The SR865 operates from a 100V, 120V, 220V, or 240V nominal ac power source having 

a line frequency of 50 or 60 Hz. Before connecting the power cord, verify that the LINE 

VOLTAGE SELECTOR card, located in the rear panel fuse holder, is set so that the 

correct ac input voltage value is indicated by the white dot. 

Conversion to other ac input voltages requires a change in the voltage selector card 

position and fuse value. See Appendix F (page 177) for detailed instructions.

Line Fuse

Verify that the correct line fuse is installed before connecting the line cord. For 

100V/120V, use a 1 Amp fuse and for 220V/240V, use a 1/2 Amp fuse. See Appendix F

(page 177) for detailed fuse installation instructions.

Line Cord

The SR865 has a detachable, three-wire power cord for connection to the power source 

and to a protective ground. The exposed metal parts of the instrument are connected to 

the outlet ground to protect against electrical shock. Always use an outlet which has a 

properly connected protective ground. Power Cord

Grounding

A chassis grounding lug is available on the back panel of the SR865. Connect a heavy 

duty ground wire, #12AWG or larger, from the CHASSIS GROUND lug directly to a 

facility earth ground to provide additional protection against electrical shock. 

Grounded BNC shields are connected to the chassis ground. Do not apply any voltage to 

the grounded shields. The A and B signal input shields are connected to chassis ground 

through resistors and can tolerate up to 1 V of applied voltage.

GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter)

GFCI protected outlets are often available in production and laboratory environments, 

particularly in proximity to water sources. GFCI’s are generally regarded as an important 

defense against electrocution. However, the use of GFCI in conjunction with the SR865

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
ii Safety and Preparation For Use

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

must not be regarded as a substitute for proper grounding and careful system design. 

GFCI’s must also be tested regularly to verify their functionality. Always consult an 

electrician when in doubt.

Service

Do not attempt to service this instrument unless another person, capable of providing first 

aid or resuscitation, is present.

Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modifications to this 

instrument. Contact the factory for instructions on how to return the instrument for 

authorized service and adjustment.

Warning Regarding Use With Photomultipliers and Other

Detectors

The front end amplifier of this instrument is easily damaged if a photomultiplier is used 

improperly with the amplifier. When left completely unterminated, a cable connected to a 

PMT can charge to several hundred volts in a relatively short time. If this cable is 

connected to the inputs of the SR865 the stored charge may damage the front-end 

amplifier. To avoid this problem, always discharge the cable and connect the PMT output 

to the SR865 input before turning the PMT on.

Furnished Accessories

• Power Cord

• Operating Manual

Environmental Conditions

Operating

Temperature: +10 °C to +40 °C

(Specifications apply over +18 °C to +28 °C)

Relative Humidity: <90 % Non-condensing

Non-Operating

Temperature: −25°C to 65°C

Humidity: <95 % Non-condensing

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Safety and Preparation For Use iii

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
iv Safety and Preparation For Use

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Contents v

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Contents

Safety and Preparation for Use i

Contents v

SR865 Specifications vii

SR865 Command List x

SR865 Status Bytes xv

Chapter 1 Getting Started 1

Introduction 1

SR865 Front Panel 2

SR865 Touchscreen 4

The Basic Lock-in 9

Using Displays 13

Sensitivity, Offset and Expand 20

Saving and Recalling Setups 25

Aux Outputs and Inputs 28

Scanning 30

Chapter 2 Lock-in Amplifier Basics 37

What is a Lock-in Amplifier? 37

What Does a Lock-in Measure? 40

Block diagram 41

The Reference Oscillator 42

The Phase Sensitive Detectors 43

Time Constants and Sensitivity 44

Outputs and Scales 46

What is Dynamic Reserve Really? 48

The Input Amplifier 50

Input Connections 51

Intrinsic (Random) Noise Sources 54

External Noise Sources 55

Noise Measurements 58

Chapter 3 Operation 61

Introduction 61

Standard Settings 64

Signal Input 65

CH1 and CH2 Outputs: Offset, Ratio and Expand 71

Reference 74

Display 81

Cursor 83

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
vi Contents

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Functions 85

Interface and Data 87

Setup 88

Rear Panel 96

Chapter 4 Programming 101

Introduction 101

Command Syntax 103

Reference Commands 106

Signal Commands 111

CH1/CH2 Output Commands 114

Aux Input and Output Commands 116

Auto Function Commands 117

Display Commands 118

Strip Chart Commands 120

FFT Screen Commands 125

Scan Commands 128

Data Transfer Commands 132

Data Capture Commands 134

Data Streaming Commands 140

System Commands 143

Interface Commands 146

Status Reporting Commands 148

Status Byte Definitions 151

Appendix A Advanced Filters 155

Appendix B The FFT Display 161

Appendix C Using the Webserver 169

Appendix D Data Streaming and Capture 171

Appendix E Dual Reference Detection 175

Appendix F Fuse Installation and ac Line Select 177

Appendix G Performance Tests 181

Appendix H Circuit Description 201

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Specifications vii

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SR865 Specifications

Signal Channel

Voltage Inputs Single-ended (A) or differential (A−B)

Sensitivity (Output Scale) 1 nV to 1 V (voltage input)

1 fA to 1 μA (current input)

Input Impedance 10 MΩ+25 pF, ac (>1 Hz) or dc coupled

Input Range 10 mV to 1 V (peak); max input before overload

Gain Accuracy 1% below 200 kHz and 2% to 2 MHz (signal amplitude <30% of input range)

Input Noise 2.5 nV/√Hz at 1 kHz, 10 mV input range (typical)

CMRR Greater than 90 dB at 1 kHz (dc Coupled)

Harmonic Distortion −80 dB below 100 kHz, −60 dB above 100 kHz

Dynamic Reserve Greater than 120 dB

Current Input Ranges 1 μA or 10 nA

Reference Channel

Frequency Range 1 mHz to 2 MHz specified (operates to 2.5 MHz)

Timebase 10 MHz In/Out phase locks the internal frequency to other SR865 units

Ext TTL Reference Minimum 2 V logic level, rising or falling edge

Ext Sine Reference 400 mV pk–pk minimum signal, ac coupled (>1 Hz)

Ext Reference Input Impedance 1 MΩ or 50 Ω

Acquisition Time (2 cycles + 5 ms) or 40 ms, whichever is greater

Phase Setting Resolution 360/232 deg

Phase Noise Ext TTL reference: <0.001° rms at 1 kHz, (100 ms, 12 dB/oct) (typical)

Internal reference: <0.0001° rms at 1 kHz (100 ms, 12 dB/oct)

Phase Drift Sine Out to Signal In (200 mVrms)

<0.002°/°C below 20 kHz (dc coupled input)

<0.02°/°C below 200 kHz

<0.2°/°C below 2 MHz

Harmonic Detect Detect at N×fref where N≤99 and N×fref<2 MHz

Dual F Reference Detect at fdual = | fint − fext |

All frequencies less than 2 MHz for specified performance (operates to 2.5 MHz)

Chopper Reference SR865 drives SR540 Chopper (via Aux Out 4) to lock the chopper to fint

Demodulator

dc Stability Digital output values have no offset drift

Time Constants 1 μs to 30 ks

Low Pass Filters Typical RC type filters or Advanced Gaussian/Linear Phase filters

Filter Slope 6, 12, 18, 24 dB/oct rolloffs

Synchronous Filter Available below 4 kHz

Harmonic Rejection −80 dB

Low Latency Output Rear panel BlazeX output with <2 μs delay (plus low pass filter rise/fall times)

Internal Oscillator

Frequency 1 mHz to 2 MHz specified (operates to 2.5 MHz)

Frequency Accuracy 25 ppm + 30 μHz with internal timebase

External Timebase 10 MHz timebase input/output on rear panel

Frequency Resolution 6 digits or 0.1 mHz, whichever is greater

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
viii Specifications

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Sine Output

Outputs Differential or Single-ended

Output Impedance 50 Ω source

Amplitude 1 nVrms to 2 Vrms (specified amplitude is differential into 50 Ω loads)

Output amplitude is halved when used single-ended

Output amplitude is doubled into a high impedance load

Amplitude Resolution 3 digits or 1 nV, whichever is greater

dc Offset ±5 V, differential or common mode

Offset Resolution 3 digits or 0.1 mV, whichever is greater

Output Limit ±6 V, sum of dc offset and peak amplitude

Sync Logic level sync on rear panel (via BlazeX output)

Data 

Data Channels 4 data channels are displayed and graphed (green, blue, yellow, orange)

Data Sources Each data channel can be assigned any of these data sources:

X, Y, R, θ, Aux In 1–4, Aux Out 1–2, Xnoise, Ynoise, Sine Out Amplitude, Sine Out 

DC Level, reference phase, fint or fext

Data History All data sources are continuously stored at all chart display time scales.

The complete stored history of any data source can be displayed at any time.

Offset X, Y and R may be offset up to ±999% of the sensitivity

Ratio X, and Y may be ratioed by Aux In 3; R may be ratioed by Aux In 4

Expand X, Y and R may be expanded by ×10 or ×100

Capture Buffer 1 Mpoints internal data storage. Store (X), (X and Y), (R and θ) or (X, Y, R and θ) 

at sample rates up to 1.25 MHz. This is in addition to the data histories for the 

chart display.

Data Streaming Realtime streaming of data, either (X), (X and Y), (R and θ) or (X, Y, R and θ) at

sample rates up to 1.25 MHz over Ethernet interface 

Scanning One of the following parameters may be scanned:

fint, Sine Out Amplitude, Sine Out DC Level, Aux Out 1 or 2.

FFT

Source Input ADC, demodulator output, or filter output

Record length 1024 bins

Averaging exponential rms

Inputs and Outputs

CH 1 Output Proportional to X or R, ±10 V full scale thru 50 Ω

CH 2 Output Proportional to Y or θ, ±10 V full scale thru 50 Ω

X and Y Outputs Proportional to X and Y, ±10 V full scale thru 50 Ω, rear panel

BlazeX Low latency output of X, ±2.0 V full scale or

logic level reference sync output, either thru 50 Ω

Aux Outputs 4 BNC D/A outputs, ±10.5 V thru 50 Ω, 1 mV resolution

Aux Inputs 4 BNC A/D inputs, ±10.5 V, 1 mV resolution, 1 MΩ input

Trigger Input TTL input triggers storage into the internal capture buffer

Monitor Output Analog output of the signal amplifier

HDMI Video output to external monitor or TV, 640x480/60 Hz.

Timebase Input/Output 1 Vrms 10 MHz clock to synchronize internal reference frequency to other units

General

Interfaces IEEE488, RS-232, USB device (Test and Measurement Class) and Ethernet

(VXI-11 and telnet)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Specifications ix

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

USB Flash Front panel slot for USB flash storage of screen shots and data, and firmware 

upgrades

Preamp Power 9 pin D connector to power SRS preamps

Power 60 Watts, 100/120/220/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz

Dimensions 17"W × 5.25"H × 17"D

Weight 22 lbs

Warranty One year parts and labor on materials and workmanship

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
x Commands

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SR865 Command List

Reference Commands page description

TBMODE(?) { AUTO | INternal | i } 106 Set the 10 MHz timebase

TBSTAT? 106 Query the current 10 MHz timebase ext (0) or int (1)

PHAS(?) { p } { UDEG | MDEG | DEG | URAD | MRAD | RAD } 106 Set the reference phase to p

APHS 106 Auto Phase

FREQ(?) { f } { HZ | KHZ | MHZ } 106 Set the reference frequency to f

FREQINT(?) { f } { HZ | KHZ | MHZ } 107 Set the internal reference frequency to f

FREQEXT? 107 Query the external reference frequency

FREQDET? 107 Query the detection frequency

HARM(?) { i } 107 Set harmonic detect to i

HARMDUAL(?) { i } 107 Set harmonic for dual reference mode to i

BLADESLOTS(?) {SLT6 | SLT30 | i } 108 Set the chopper blade number of slots

BLADEPHASE(?) { p } { UDEG | MDEG | DEG | URAD | MRAD | 

RAD }

108 Set the chopper blade phase to p

SLVL(?) { v } { NV | UV | MV | V } 108 Set sine output amplitude to v

SOFF(?) { v } { NV | UV | MV | V } 108 Set sine output dc level to v

REFM(?) { COMmon | DIFference | i } 109 Set sine output dc mode

RSRC(?) { INT | EXT | DUAL | CHOP | i } 109 Set reference mode

RTRG(?) { SIN | POSttl | NEGttl | i } 109 Set external reference trigger

REFZ(?) { 50ohms | 1Meg | i } 109 Set external reference input impedance

PSTF(?) [ j ] { , f { HZ | KHZ | MHZ } } 110 Set frequency preset j to f

PSTA(?) [ j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 110 Set sine amplitude preset j to v

PSTL(?) [ j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 110 Set sine dc level preset j to v

Signal Commands page description

IVMD(?) { VOLTage | CURRent | i } 111 Set input to voltage/current

ISRC(?) { A | A−B | i } 111 Set voltage input configuration

ICPL(?) { AC | DC | i } 111 Set voltage input coupling

IGND(?) { FLOat | GROund | i } 111 Set voltage input shield grounding

IRNG(?) { 1Volt | 300Mvolt | 100Mvolt | 30Mvolt | 10Mvolt | i } 111 Set voltage input range

ICUR(?) { 1MEG | 100MEG | i } 112 Set current input gain

ILVL? 112 Query the signal strength low to overload (0–4)

SCAL(?) { i } 112 Set sensitivity from 1V (0) to 1 nV (27)

OFLT(?) { i } 113 Set time constant from 1 μs (0) to 30 ks (21)

OFSL(?) { i } 113 Set filter slope from 6 dB (0) to 24 dB (3)

SYNC(?) { OFF | ON | i } 113 Turn synchronous filter off/on

ADVFILT(?) { OFF | ON | i } 113 Turn advanced filtering off/on

ENBW? 113 Query the equivalent noise bandwidth

CH1/CH2 Output Commands page description

COUT(?) [ OCH1 | OCH2 | j ] { , XY | RTHeta | i } 114 Set CH1/2 to (X or R)/(Y or θ)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Commands xi

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CEXP(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , OFF | X10 | X100 | i } 114 Set CH1/2 expand

COFA(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , OFF | ON | i } 114 Turn CH1/2 output offset off/on

COFP(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , x } 114 Set CH1/2 output offset to x percent

OAUT [ X | Y | R | j ] 114 Auto Offset CH1/2

CRAT(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , OFF | ON | i } 115 Ratio Ch1/2 with Aux In 3 or 4

Aux Input and Output Commands page description

OAUX? [ j ] 116 Query Aux Input j (0–3)

AUXV(?) [ j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 116 Set Aux Output j (0–3) voltage to v

Auto Function Commands page description

APHS 117 Auto Phase

ARNG 117 Auto Range

ASCL 117 Auto Scale

Display Commands page description

DBLK(?) { OFF | ON | i } 118 Turn front panel blanking off/on

DLAY(?) { TREnd | HISTory | BARHist | FFT | BARFft | BAREight | i } 118 Set Screen Layout

DCAP 118 Screen Shot to USB memory stick

CDSP(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , parameter | i } 118 Assign parameter i to data channel j 

CGRF(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , OFF | ON | i } 119 Turn data channel j strip graph off/on

GETSCREEN? 119 Download screen capture image

Strip Chart Commands page description

GSPD(?) { i } 120 Set horizontal scale from 0.5 s (0) to 2 days (16)

GSCL(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , x } 120 Set channel j vertical scale to x

GOFF(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , x } 120 Set channel j vertical offset

GAUT [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] 121 Auto scale channel j

GACT [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] 121 Auto scale with zero center channel j

GAUF [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] 121 Auto find for channel j

CGRF(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , { OFF | ON | i } } 121 Turn channel j graph off/on

GLIV(?) { OFF | ON | i } 122 Turn strip chart off/on (pause/run)

PCUR(?) { i } 122 Move cursor to i (0=right, 639=left)

CURREL(?) {OFF | ON | i} 122 Set cursor relative or absolute mode

CURDISP(?) {i} 122 Set cursor horizontal mode to date/time or interval

CURBUG(?) {AVG | MAX | MIN | i} 122 Set cursor to mean / maximum / minimum

FCRW(?) { LIne | NARrow | WIde | i } 123 Set the cursor width

SCRY? [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | STATus | j ] 123 Query the cursor data values

CURDATTIM? 123 Query the cursor horizontal position as date/time

CURINTERVAL? 124 Query the cursor horizontal position as interval

FFT Screen Commands page description

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xii Commands

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

FFTR(?) { ADC | MIXer | FILTer | i } 125 Set FFT data source

FFTS(?) { i } 125 Set vertical scale from 1.0 dB (0) to 200 dB (7)

FFTO(?) { x } 125 Set top reference level

FAUT 126 FFT auto scale

FFTMAXSPAN? 126 Query maximum allowed frequency span in Hz/div

FFTSPAN(?) { x } 126 Set frequency span in Hz/div

FFTA(?) { AVG1 | AVG3 | AVG10 | AVG30 | AVG100 | i } 126 Set averaging

FFTL(?) { OFF | ON | i } 126 Turn FFT off/on (pause/live)

FCRW(?) { LIne | NARrow | WIde | i } 126 Set the cursor width

FCRX? 127 Query the FFT cursor frequency

FCRY? 127 Query the FFT cursor amplitude

Scan Commands page description

SCNPAR(?) { Fint | REFAmp | REFDc | OUT1 | OUT2 | i } 128 Set the scan parameter

SCNLOG(?) { LIN | LOG | i } 128 Set the scan type

SCNEND(?) { ONce | REpeat | UPdown | i } 128 Set the scan end mode

SCNSEC(?) { x } 128 Set the scan time to x seconds

SCNAMPATTN(?) {i} 128 Set the amplitude attenuator mode for scanning

SCNDCATTN(?) {i} 129 Set the dc attenuator mode for scanning

SCNINRVL(?) {i} 129 Set the scan parameter update interval

SCNENBL(?) { OFF | ON | i } 129 Turn the scan off/on

SCNRUN 130 Start or resume the scan

SCNPAUSE 130 Pause the scan

SCNRST 130 Reset the scan

SCNSTATE? 130 Query the scan (off, reset, run, pause or done)(0-4)

SCNFREQ(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , f { HZ | KHZ | MHZ } } 130 Set the begin/end frequency

SCNAMP(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 130 Set the begin/end reference amplitude

SCNDC(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 130 Set the begin/end reference dc level

SCNAUX1(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 131 Set the begin/end AuxOut1 value

SCNAUX2(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } } 131 Set the begin/end AuxOut2 value

Data Transfer Commands page description

OUTR? [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] 132 Query data channel j

OUTP? [ j ] 132 Query lock-in parameter j

SNAP? [ j, k ] { , l } 132 Query multiple lock-in parameters at once

Data Capture Commands page description

CAPTURELEN(?) { n } 136 Set the buffer length to n 1 kbyte blocks

CAPTURECFG(?) { X | XY | RT | XYRT | i } 136 Configure capture to X, XY, Rθ or XYRθ (0–3)

CAPTURERATEMAX? 136 Query the maximum capture rate

CAPTURERATE(?) { n } 136 Set the capture rate to (max rate)/2n

CAPTURESTART [ ONEshot | CONTinuous | i ] , [ OFF | ON | j ] 137 Start capture (OneShot or Cont) (HW trigger off/on)

CAPTURESTOP 137 Stop capture

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Commands xiii

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CAPTURESTAT? 137 Query the capture buffer state

CAPTUREPROG? 138 Query the length (kB) of captured data (after stop)

CAPTUREVAL? [ n ] 138 Query the nth sample (1, 2 or 4 values) (after stop)

CAPTUREGET? [ i ], [ j ] 138 Download binary capture buffer

Data Streaming Commands page description

STREAMCH(?) { X | XY | RT | XYRT | i } 140 Configure streaming to X, XY, Rθ or XYRθ (0–3)

STREAMRATEMAX? 141 Query the maximum streaming rate

STREAMRATE(?) { n } 141 Set the streaming rate to (max rate)/2n

STREAMFMT(?) { i } 141 Set the streaming format to float32 (0) or int16 (1)

STREAMPCKT(?) { i } 141 Set packet size to 1024, 512, 256 or 128 bytes (0–3)

STREAMPORT(?) { i } 142 Sets the Ethernet port to i=1024–65535

STREAMOPTION(?) { i } 142 Sets big/little endianness and integrity checking

STREAM(?) { OFF | ON | i } 142 Turn streaming off/on

System Commands page description

TIME(?) [ SEConds | MINutes | HOUrs | j ] { , i } 143 Set time

DATE(?) [ DAY | MONth | YEAr | j ] { , i } 143 Set date

TBMODE(?) { AUTO | INternal | i } 143 Set the 10 MHz timebase

TBSTAT? 143 Query the current 10 MHz timebase ext (0) or int (1)

BLAZEX(?) { BLazex | BIsync | UNIsync | i } 143 Select the BlazeX output

KEYC(?) { ON | MUte| i } 144 Turn sounds on or off

PRMD(?) { SCReen | PRNt | MONOchrome | i } 144 Set screen shot mode

SDFM(?) { CSV | MATfile | i } 144 Set data file type

FBAS(?) { s } 144 Set file name prefix

FNUM(?) { i } 144 Set file name suffix

FNXT? 145 Query next file name

DCAP 145 Screen shot

SVDT 145 Save data

Interface Commands page description

*RST 146 Reset the unit to its default configuration

*IDN? 146 Query the unit identification string

*TST? 146 No-op, returns “0” 

*OPC(?) 146 Operation Complete

LOCL(?) { i } 146 Set LOCAL (0), REMOTE (1) or LOCKOUT (2)

OVRM (?) { OFF | ON | i } 147 Set GPIB Overide Remote off (0) or on (1)

Status Reporting Commands page description

*CLS 148 Clear all status bytes

*ESE(?) { j, } { i } 148 Set the standard event enable register

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xiv Commands

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

*ESR? { j } 148 Query the standard event status byte

*SRE(?) { j, } { i } 148 Set the serial poll enable register

*STB? { j } 148 Query the serial poll status byte

*PSC(?) { i } 149 Set the Power-On Status Clear bit

ERRE(?) { j, } { i } 149 Set the error status enable register

ERRS? { j } 149 Query the error status byte

LIAE(?) { j, } { i } 149 Set LIA status enable register

LIAS? { j } 150 Query the LIA status word

CUROVLDSTAT? 150 Query the present overload states

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Commands xv

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SR865 Status Bytes

Serial Poll Status Byte

bit name usage

0 unused

1 unused

2 ERR An enabled bit in the error status byte has been set

3 LIA An enabled bit in the LIA status byte has been set

4 MAV The interface output buffer is non-empty

5 ESB An enabled bit in the standard status byte has been set

6 SRQ SRQ (service request) has occurred

7 unused

Standard Event Status Byte

bit name usage

0 OPC Operation complete

1 INP Input queue overflow

2 unused

3 QRY Output queue overflow

4 EXE A command cannot execute correctly or a parameter is out of range

5 CMD An illegal command is received

6 URQ Set by any user front panel action

7 PON Set by power-on

LIA Status Word

bit name usage

0 CH1OV CH1 output overload

1 CH2OV CH2 output overload

2 unused

3 UNLK External reference or Chop unlock detected

4 RANGE Input range overload detected

5 SYNCF Sync filter frequency out of range

6 SYNCOV Sync filter overload

7 TRIG Set when data storage is triggered

8 DAT1OV Data Channel 1 output overload

9 DAT2OV Data Channel 2 output overload

10 DAT3OV Data Channel 3 output overload

11 DAT4OV Data Channel 4 output overload

12 DCAPFIN Display capture to USB stick completed

13 SCNST Scan started

14 SCNFIN Scan completed

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
xvi Commands

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Error Status Byte

bit name usage

0 CLK External 10 MHz clock input error

1 BACKUP Battery backup failed

2 unused

3 unused

4 VXI VXI-11 error

5 GPIB GPIB fast data transfer mode aborted

6 USBDEV USB device error (interface error)

7 USBHOST USB host error (memory stick error)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Getting Started 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Chapter 1 

Getting Started

Introduction

The sample measurements described in this section are designed to acquaint the first time 

user with the SR865 DSP Lock-In Amplifier. Do not be concerned that your 

measurements do not exactly agree with these exercises. The focus of these measurement 

exercises is to learn how to use the instrument. It is highly recommended that the first 

time user step through some or all of these exercises before attempting to perform an 

actual experiment. 

Keys, Knobs and Touch Buttons

[Key] Front panel keys are referred to in [square] brackets. Some keys have a 

second italicized label. Press and hold these keys for 2 seconds to invoke 

the italicized function.

<Knob> Knobs are referred to in <angle> brackets. Knobs are used to adjust 

parameters which have a wide range of values. Some knobs have a push 

button function. Some also have a second italicized label. Press and hold 

these knobs for 2 seconds to invoke the italicized function.

{Touch} Touchscreen buttons and icons are referred to in {curly} brackets. 

Touchscreen buttons are used to adjust the data display as well as change 

certain lock-in parameters.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
2 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SR865 Front Panel

The SR865’s buttons and knobs are mainly used to configure the lock-in measurement, 

while the touchscreen is mainly for data display. The touchscreen display is also used for 

keypad entry.

Signal Path

The signal path settings configure input BNC’s, input gain, time constant and filters and 

the sensitivity. Unlike previous generation lock-ins, the SR865 does not have a dynamic 

reserve setting. The input range setting is simply the largest input signal before overload. 

It is best to decrease the input range setting as much as possible without overload. This 

increases the gain and utilizes more of the A/D converter’s range as indicated by the 

signal strength LEDs.

The sensitivity determines the scale factor for the analog outputs (CH1 and CH2) as well 

as the numeric readouts and bar graphs. The sensitivity does not affect the measurement 

values, it simply determines how much signal corresponds to a full scale 10V output from 

CH1 and CH2 outputs and a 100% bar graph. It also sets the scale for the 5 digit numeric 

displays. The sensitivity should be viewed as an output function only.

Reference

The reference settings configure the lock-in reference frequency and source. In addition 

to internal and external reference, the SR865 includes dual reference (detect at |fint − fext|) 

and chop (lock an SR540 chopper TO the SR865 fint) modes.

The SR865 can be synchronized to an external 10 MHz frequency reference (from 

another SR865 or other source). This allows multiple SR865’s to run in phase sync with 

each other in internal reference mode.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The sine output from the SR865 is differential. This provides improved performance at 

low amplitudes. A variable dc offset is provided in both differential and common mode. 

Use either sine out for single ended excitation.

Outputs

The CH1 output can be proportional to either X or R, while the CH2 output can be 

proportional to Y or θ. Output functions include offset (up to ±999% of the sensitivity), 

expand (up to ×100) and ratio. These functions are generally only used when the CH1 or 

CH2 outputs are being used to drive other parts of an experiment.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
4 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SR865 Touchscreen

The SR865 screen displays the lock-in outputs both numerically and graphically. Touch 

buttons and icons are used to adjust the data displays as well as enter certain lock-in 

parameters.

Screen Layout

Press [Screen Layout] to cycle through the different screen layouts.

 Trend Graph Full Screen Strip Chart

 Half Screen Strip Chart Full Screen FFT

 Half Screen FFT Big Numbers

The SR865 displays up to 4 channels at a time, in green, blue, yellow and orange. Each 

channel is assigned a parameter using the [Config] key. Parameters are chosen from X, 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 5

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Y, R, θ (detected), fint, fext, phase (setting), Sine Amplitude, DC Level, any Aux Input, 

Aux Output 1 or 2, Xnoise, or Ynoise.

Displayed parameters can be re-assigned at any time. Data is being stored for all possible 

parameters all of the time. 

Info Bar and Numeric Entry

Each of the data screens always displays a lock-in info bar across the top.

This bar always shows tiles displaying the phase, frequency, detect harmonic, sine out 

amplitude and dc offset of the sine out. Each of these parameters can be adjusted using 

the knobs and buttons in the reference settings section of the front panel.

Touching one of these tiles brings up a numeric keypad for direct entry.

Internal frequency entry screen

Numeric entry is straightforward. {Close} will return to the data screen. The buttons 

{F1}, {F2}, {F3} and {F4} are frequency presets. Touching a preset will load the preset 

value immediately. Touch and hold a preset button to memorize the current setting. Other 

parameters may have slightly different entry screens.

Strip Charts

The most common way to visualize the lock-in outputs is to use the strip chart display. 

New data is plotted at the right edge and older data scrolls left. The scroll rate is 

determined by the horizontal scale (time per division). For example, a scale of 1s/div 

presents the 10 most recent seconds of data and data points take 10 s to scroll completely 

off the left edge. Horizontal scales range from 0.5 s to 2 days per division. 

At each point along the horizontal axis, the graph displays the maximum to minimum 

excursion of each data channel during a time interval corresponding to that point in the 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
6 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

past. The time interval is determined by the horizontal scale per division and the number 

of pixels in the display. There are 640 pixels across 10 divisions of the graph. Thus there 

are 64 pixels in each division. At a scale of 0.5 s/div, each pixel represents about 8 ms of 

data. At a scale of 1 min/div, each pixel represents about 1s of data. This ‘binning’ is 

fundamental to the SR865 strip chart display. All time scales are stored all of the time. 

This allows the horizontal scale to change without re-acquiring any data. The caveat is 

that all graphs are drawn with the most recent point at the right hand edge.

Zooming in and out (changing the horizontal scale) always displays the most recent point 

at the right edge. There is no zooming in about a point in the distant past.

All parameters which may be assigned to a data channel are continuously recorded even 

when they are not displayed. This means that historical data can be viewed for all 

parameters simply by assigning them to a data channel and viewing the strip chart.

Strip charts may be paused. When the graph is paused, the cursor can be used to readout 

data values. Data storage continues in the background while the graph is paused. When 

live scrolling is resumed, the graph is redrawn so the most recent point is once again at 

the right edge.

Graph Scale Bar

Strip Chart displays have a scale bar at the bottom of the screen.

This bar shows tiles indicating the vertical scale per division for the 4 data channels 

(green, blue, yellow and orange) and the horizontal time scale per division (white).

Touch a data channel’s scale tile to display a palette of scale functions.

Chart vertical scale palette

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 7

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Use the palette functions to scale the selected data channel’s graph. Touch the scale tile 

again to dismiss the palette.

 Vertical Scale Palette Horizontal Scale Palette

Vertical Scale Palette

Vertical scale changes are applied to each data channel separately. {Autoscale} adjusts 

the scale and center so the graph occupies as much of the screen as possible. {Autoscale 

Zero Center} forces the center of the graph to be zero and then sets the scale to show the 

data. The location of zero is indicated by the small triangle on the right edge. It points left 

where zero is. It points up or down if zero is above or below the graph.

{Zoom In} and {Zoom Out} change the scale about the center. Use {Center Newest 

Point} to bring the current point to the center of the graph before zooming in or out. 

{Move Up} and {Move Down} simply move the graph up and down on the screen. The 

graph can also be moved simply by touching and dragging on the screen while the 

vertical scale palette is displayed.

Each graph can also be turned off. Touch the scale tile to turn the graph back on.

All changes to the graphs are non-destructive. They simply change the way data is 

visualized. Stored parameter values are not altered by scale changes.

Horizontal Scale Palette

Horizontal scale changes are applied to the entire strip chart display and all data channels.

{Zoom In} and {Zoom Out} change the horizontal scale and scroll speed.

{Pause} stops the chart scrolling and pauses the graph. When the graph is paused, the 

cursor can be used to readout data values. These readouts correspond to the min, max or 

mean of the data in the time bin at the cursor location. The time of the cursor location is 

displayed in the tile at the left edge of the scale bar below the graph. Touch this tile to 

switch between elapsed time from the right edge to absolute time (time and date when the 

point was taken). Use {Cursor MinMaxMean} and {Cursor Width} to change the cursor. 

Note that the cursor marker may not lie on the data graph for wide cursors since the 

marker shows the min, max or mean of all the data within the cursor width.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
8 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The cursor is only displayed when the graph is paused.

Zooming in and out preserves the right hand edge of the graph at the point in time when 

the graph was paused.

Data storage continues in the background while the graph is paused. When live scrolling 

is resumed with {Resume}, the graph is redrawn so the current point is once again at the 

right edge.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 9

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The Basic Lock-in

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator to explore some of the basic lock-in functions. 

Specifically, you will measure the amplitude of the Sine Out at various frequencies, amplitudes, time 

constants and phase shifts. 

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Connect the Sine Out + on the front panel to the 

A input using a BNC cable.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator 

reference set at 100.000 kHz. The reference 

source is indicated by the Internal LED. In this 

mode, the lock-in generates a synchronous sine 

output at the internal reference frequency.

The default data screen is the Trend Graph. The

4 displayed parameters default to X, Y, R and θ. 

Each parameter has a numeric display, a bar 

graph and a trend graph. The trend graph is a 

continuously autoscaling graph of the recent 

history of each parameter. This data screen has 

no adjustments available.

The default sine amplitude is 0 Vrms. Thus the 

data displays will read 0 for X, Y and R. θ will 

be just noise.

3. Touch {Ampl} in the info bar along the top of 

the screen. Then {5}{0}{0}{mV}.

The lock-in parameters shown in the info bar at 

the top of the screen may be entered using a 

numeric keypad simply by touching them.

The Sine Out amplitude is specified for 

differential output (Sine+) − (Sine−). In this 

case, each BNC has an amplitude of 250 mV 

(rms) with a 50Ω output. The lock-in input is 

high impedance so the output of each BNC is 

doubled and the lock-in measures 500 mV.

Since the phase shift of the sine output is very 

close to zero, X (green) should read about 

0.5000 and Y (blue) should read close to 

0.0000 V.

4. Press the [Auto Phase] key. Automatically adjust the reference phase shift 

to eliminate any residual phase error. This 

should set the values of Y and θ to zero.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
10 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

5. Press the [+90o] key. This adds 90o to the reference phase shift. The 

value of X drops to zero and Y becomes minus 

the magnitude (−0.5000 V).

Use the <Phase> knob to adjust the phase shift 

back to zero (press and hold the <Phase> knob 

inward as a short cut). The Phase shift is 

displayed in the info bar at the top of the screen.

The lock-in parameters shown in the info bar, 

Phase, Reference Frequency, Detected 

Harmonic, Sine Amplitude and Offset, can all 

be adjusted from the front panel as well as via a 

touchscreen keypad.

6. Touch {Fint} in the info bar. Display the numeric entry screen for internal 

reference frequency. The 4 buttons labelled 

{F1} thru {F4} are frequency presets. Press and 

hold them to memorize new frequencies.

Touch {1}{0}{kHz} to enter a new frequency. Change the frequency to 10 kHz.

Use the <Frequency> knob to adjust the 

frequency to 1.00000 kHz.

The knob is very useful for making small 

adjustments or optimizing a setting. Large 

changes are better left to the numeric keypad.

The measured signal amplitude X and R should 

stay within 1% of 500 mV and Y and θ should 

stay close to zero.

7. Use the <Amplitude> knob to adjust the sine out 

to 5.0 mV. The Amplitude is displayed in the 

info bar.

As the amplitude is changed, the values of X 

and R change to follow.

The yellow LED in the Input Range section 

should light. The Input Range is the largest 

input signal before overload. The lower the 

range, the higher the gain. The signal strength 

indicates how much of the A/D converter range 

is being used. When the yellow indicator lights, 

it means that more gain should be used.

Since the signal has just been reduced by a 

factor of 100, the input range should be 

adjusted as well.

8. Press [Auto Range]. The Auto Range function changes the Input 

Range to maximize the signal at the A/D 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 11

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

converter without overload. In this case the 

Input Range should change to 10 mV.

The Input Range is the peak allowable voltage 

at the input, whether noise or signal. In this 

case, the signal is 5 mVrms or 7 mVpk so 

10 mV is the best allowed setting.

The signal strength increases from the 

minimum (yellow) to something in the middle.

9. Use the <Amplitude> knob to increase the sine 

out to 50.0 mV. The Amplitude is displayed in 

the info bar.

The peak signal exceeds the input range so the 

Input Range Overload LED lights. Ovld 

indicators also appear on the screen when a 

displayed value is invalidated by an input 

overload.

10. Press [Auto Range]. During Input Range Overload, the Auto Range 

function selects the 1 V range.

Press [Auto Range] again. From the 1 V range, the Auto Range function 

changes the Input Range to maximize the signal 

at the A/D converter without overload. The 

Input Range should change to 100 mV.

10. Press [Input Range Down] to select 30 mV. Settings which have many options, such as 

Input Range, Time Constant and Sensitivity, are 

changed with up and down keys. The setting is 

indicated by LEDs.

The peak signal exceeds the input range so the 

Input Range Overload LED lights. Ovld 

indicators also appear on the screen when a 

displayed value is invalidated by an input 

overload.

Press [Input Range Up] to select 100 mV.

11. Press [Sensitivity Down] multiple times to select 

50 mV.

The Sensitivity is indicated with 3 LEDs. In this 

case, the 5, ×10 and mV should be lit.

The Sensitivity sets full scale for the bar graphs 

and the resolution for the numeric readouts for 

X, Y and R. Sensitivity is also the signal 

reading corresponding to 10 V on the CH1 and 

CH2 outputs (for X, Y and R).

By decreasing the scale value, the bar graphs 

and numeric readings display much more 

resolution for the smaller signal.

12. Press [Time Constant Down] multiple times to The Time Constant is indicated with 3 LEDs. In 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
12 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

select 300 μs. this case, the 3, ×100 and μs.

The output values become noisy. This is 

because the 2f component of the output (at 

2 kHz) is no longer attenuated completely by 

the low pass filter.

The red Output Overload LED for CH1 will 

light indicating that the output voltage is 

clipping. The 50 mV signal outputs 10 V when 

the sensitivity is 50 mV. The large additional 2f 

component will cause the output to try and 

exceed 10 V and results in an output overload. 

Output overload does not affect the actual 

displayed value, it just indicates that the CH1 

(or CH2) output is not following the measured 

value.

12. Press [Slope] to select 12 dB/oct. Parameters which have only a few values, such 

as Filter Slope and External Source, have only a 

single key which cycles through all available 

options. Press the key until the desired option is 

indicated by an LED.

The outputs are less noisy with 2 poles of 

filtering.

Press [Slope] twice more to select 24 dB/oct. With 4 poles of low pass filtering, even this 

short time constant attenuates the 2f component 

reasonably well and provides steady readings.

Press [Slope] again to select 6 dB/oct. Let's leave the filtering short and the outputs 

noisy for now.

13. Press [Sync] to turn on synchronous filtering. This turns on synchronous filtering whenever 

the detection frequency is below 4.8 kHz.

Synchronous filtering effectively removes 

output components at multiples of the detection 

frequency. At low frequencies, this filter is a 

very effective way to remove 2f without using 

extremely long time constants.

The outputs are now quiet and steady, even 

though the time constant is very short. The 

response time of the synchronous filter is equal 

to the period of the detection frequency (1 ms in 

this case).

This concludes this measurement example. You 

should have a feeling for the basic operation of 

the front panel. Basic lock-in parameters have 

been introduced and you should be able to 

perform simple measurements.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 13

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Using Displays

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator and an external signal source to explore some 

of the display types. You will need a synthesized function generator capable of providing a 500 mVrms 

sine wave at 100.000 kHz, BNC cables and a terminator appropriate for the generator function output.

Specifically, you will display the lock-in outputs when measuring a signal close to, but not equal to, the 

internal reference frequency. This setup ensures changing outputs which are more illustrative than steady 

outputs. 

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Turn on the function generator, set the frequency 

to 100.000 kHz (exactly) and the amplitude to 

500 mVrms.

Connect the function output (sine wave) from 

the synthesized function generator to the A input 

using a BNC cable and appropriate terminator.

The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. 

The generator may require a terminator. Many 

generators have either a 50Ω or 600Ω output 

impedance. Use the appropriate feedthrough or 

T termination if necessary. In general, not using 

a terminator means that the function output 

amplitude will not agree with the generator 

setting.

The default screen is the Trend Graph. Four

data channels are displayed as values, bar and 

trend graphs. The trend graph is the recent 

history of each data channel with continuous 

auto-scaling. In this case R (yellow) auto scales 

to show the tiny amount of noise in the signal 

magnitude. Trend graphs have no adjustments 

and are most useful when adjusting an 

experiment to find a maximum or minimum.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator 

reference set at 100.000 kHz. The reference 

source is indicated by the Internal LED.

The internal oscillator should be very close to 

the actual generator frequency. The X (green) 

and Y (blue) displays should read values which 

change slowly. The lock-in and the generator 

are not phase locked but they are at (nearly) the 

same frequency with a slowly changing θ 

(orange). The signal magnitude R (yellow) is 

phase independent and does not change.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
14 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

3. Use the <Frequency> knob to carefully adjust 

the frequency to 99.9998 kHz. That’s 0.2 Hz 

below 100 kHz.

By setting the lock-in reference 0.2 Hz away 

from the signal frequency, the X and Y outputs 

are 0.2 Hz sine waves (difference between fref

and fsig). The X and Y displays should now 

oscillate at about 0.2 Hz (the accuracy is 

determined by the timebases of the generator 

and the lock-in).

4. Press [Screen Layout] once to change the display 

to the full screen strip chart.

The most common way to visualize the lock-in 

outputs is to use the strip chart display. New 

data is plotted at the right edge and older data 

scrolls left. The scroll rate is determined by the 

horizontal scale (time per division). The fastest 

rate is 0.5 s/div and the shows 5 s of history.

The info bar is at the top of the screen. Touch a 

tile to change a parameter using a keypad.

The numeric and bar graph displays shrink to fit 

above the chart.

The scale bar is shown below the strip chart. 

This bar shows tiles indicating the vertical scale 

per division for the 4 data channels (green, blue, 

yellow and orange) and the horizontal time 

scale per division (white).

5. Touch the orange scale tile {θ} at the bottom to 

display the vertical scale palette.

Use the palette functions to adjust the vertical 

scale of the selected data channel’s trace. Touch 

the scale tile again to dismiss the palette.

The trace may be moved up and down, auto 

scaled, zoomed in and out and dismissed 

entirely.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 15

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Touch to auto scale the orange θ graph. Touch to auto scale a trace. Touch to 

auto scale while keeping zero in the center.

The phase is ramping from −180o to +180o so 

the resulting scale is 50/div for a graph of 

±200o.

Touch the orange scale tile again to dismiss the 

scale palette.

6. Touch the green scale tile {X} to display its 

scale palette.

Touch to auto scale the green X trace. 

Selecting a scale tile automatically dismisses 

any other palette.

Touch a highlighted scale tile to simply dismiss 

its palette leaving all palettes off.

7. Touch the blue scale tile {Y} to display its scale 

palette.

Touch to auto scale the blue Y trace.

The X and Y outputs are 0.2 Hz sine waves 

with 500 mV amplitudes.

8. Touch the yellow scale tile {R} to display its

scale palette.

Touch to move the trace so the newest 

points are vertically centered.

Touch repeatedly to zoom in about the 

center. Keep zooming in until the yellow trace 

shows some noise. The scale will probably end 

up less than 1 mV.

The magnitude R is phase independent and is a 

straight flat line at about 500 mV.

By centering the trace, the zoom function will 

expand the trace to reveal noise on R.

The little triangles along the right edge indicate 

the zero for each data channel. Zooming in on R 

moves the zero for R below the graph as 

indicated by the downward facing yellow 

triangle at the bottom right edge.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
16 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

9. Touch and drag in the graph area while the 

yellow scale palette is displayed to move the 

yellow trace up and down. 

When a trace is selected (by displaying its scale 

palette) touching anywhere inside the graph 

area (and not a scale button) drags the trace up 

and down.

The and buttons also move the trace 

up and down.

10. Touch the highlighted yellow scale tile {R} to 

dismiss its scale palette.

Now touch anywhere within the graph area.

Touching within the graph area when no trace is 

selected turns on a status display across the top 

of the graph. This displays the lock-in signal 

settings.

This status is useful when the HDMI port (on 

the rear panel) is used to drive an external 

monitor or TV. Users who are looking at the 

monitor can see the lock-in front panel settings.

Touch anywhere within the graph area to dismiss 

the status display.

The status display is dismissed when the graph 

area is touched or a scale palette is displayed. 

Simply turn it back on with a touch if desired.

11. Touch the white scale tile {Time} to display the 

horizontal scale palette.

Touch repeatedly to zoom out.

Horizontal scale changes are applied to the 

entire strip chart display and all data channels.

Zooming changes the horizontal scale and scroll 

speed. The chart always displays the most 

recent point at the right edge.

In this case, zooming out displays more history 

and more cycles of X, Y and θ appear.

12. Increase the amplitude of the function generator 

to 1.5 Vrms.

The signal now exceeds the input range of 1 V 

(peak) so the Input Range Overload LED is on. 

‘Ovld’ indicators are displayed for X, Y, R and 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 17

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

θ because these values are affected by signal 

overload.

Conditions such as overload or reference unlock 

are displayed in violet along the bottom. This 

provides visual feedback about the validity of 

the data in those regions.

Decrease the amplitude of the function generator 

back to 500 mVrms.

The overload condition goes away.

13. Touch the white scale tile {Time} to display the 

horizontal scale palette.

Touch repeatedly to zoom out.

Touch repeatedly to zoom back in.

Zoom out on the horizontal time scale to show 

more and more history. When the region where 

the signal was overloaded is shown, the 

overload is indicated by the violet points along 

the bottom edge.

14. Press [Screen Layout] once to change the display 

to the half screen strip chart.

The half screen strip chart behaves the same as 

the full screen version. The only difference is 

that the numeric and bar graphs are full sized.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
18 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

15. Press [Screen Layout] again to change the 

display to the full screen FFT.

The FFT of the signal input is displayed. There 

is only a single quantity shown.

The left and right edge frequencies are labelled 

at the bottom of the graph. The cursor readout is 

at the right.

The display is adjusted with the tiles across the 

bottom. {Src} selects the source data for the 

FFT. {dB} and {Hz} adjust the vertical and 

horizontal scales. {Avgs} sets the amount of 

averages and {Live} toggles to {Paused}.

Use the <Cursor> knob to move the cursor.

16. Press [Screen Layout] again to change the 

display to the half screen FFT.

The half screen FFT display behaves the same 

as the full screen version. The only difference is 

that the numeric and bar graphs are full sized.

17. Press [Screen Layout] again to change the 

display to the full numeric display.

The full numeric screen adds readouts and bar 

graphs for the 4 aux inputs on the rear panel. 

The 4 aux outputs are shown in tiles across the 

bottom. Touching an output tile displays a 

keypad to set the aux output.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 19

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

18. Press [Screen Layout] again to cycle back to the 

trend graph.

Use [Screen Layout] to cycle through the 

various display screens.

This concludes the measurement example. You 

should have a feeling for the basic operation of 

the display screens.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
20 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Sensitivity, Offset and Expand

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator to explore some of the basic lock-in outputs. 

You will need BNC cables and a digital voltmeter (DVM).

Specifically, you will measure the amplitude of the Sine Out and provide analog outputs proportional to 

the measurement. The effect of offsets and expands on the displayed values and the analog outputs will be 

explored.

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Connect the Sine Out + on the front panel to the 

A input using a BNC cable.

The lock-in defaults to the internal oscillator 

reference set at 100.000 kHz. 

The default data screen is the Trend Graph. The 

4 displayed parameters default to X, Y, R and θ. 

Each parameter has a numeric display, a bar 

graph and a trend graph. The trend graph is a 

continuously autoscaling graph of the recent 

history of each parameter. This data screen has 

no adjustments available.

The default sine amplitude is 0 Vrms. Thus the 

data displays will read 0 for X, Y and R. θ will 

be just noise.

3. Touch {Ampl} in the info bar along the top of 

the screen. Then {1}{0}{0}{mV}.

The lock-in parameters shown in the info bar at 

the top of the screen may be entered using a 

numeric keypad simply by touching them.

The Sine Out amplitude is specified for 

differential output (Sine+) − (Sine−). In this 

case, each BNC has an amplitude of 50 mV 

(rms) with a 50Ω output. The lock-in input is 

high impedance so the output of each BNC is 

doubled and the lock-in measures 100 mV.

Since the phase shift of the sine output is very 

close to zero, X (green) should read about 

0.1000 and Y (blue) should read close to 

0.0000 V.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 21

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

4. Connect the CH1 Output on the front panel to 

the DVM. Set the DVM to read dc Volts.

The CH1 output defaults to X. The output 

voltage (with ratio disabled) is given by:

Offset Expand 10V

Sensitivity

X CH1 × × 













 = −

In this case, X = 0.1 V, Sensitivity = 1 V, the 

offset is zero percent and the expand is 1. The 

output should thus be 1 V or 10% of full scale.

Note that the bar graph for X (and R) is at 

+10%. The Sensitivity (1 V) sets the full scale 

for the bar graphs of X, Y and R.

5. Press [Screen Layout] twice to show the half 

screen strip chart.

Now let’s look at how the Sensitivity affects the 

different displays.

6. Touch the green scale tile {X} to display its 

scale palette.

Touch to auto scale the green X trace.

Touch the green highlighted scale tile again to 

dismiss the scale palette.

auto scales the trace keeping zero at the 

center. The zero location is indicated by the 

small green triangle on the right edge. The scale 

is 50 mV/div so the green data is a line 2 

divisions above the center.

7. Press [Sensitivity Down] to select 500 mV. The DVM should now read 2 V. This is because 

X (100 mV) is now 20% of the sensitivity

(500 mV). This also increases the bar graph to 

+20% and increases the resolution of the 

numeric readout.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
22 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Note that the trace of X is unchanged. This is 

because the value of X is unchanged.

The Sensitivity does not affect the value of the 

output, just the way the value is scaled to the 

displays and analog output.

The Sensitivity applies to X, Y and R.

8. Press [Sensitivity Down] two more times to 

select 100 mV.

The DVM should now read 10 V and X is now 

100% of full scale on the bar graph.

It is important to adjust the Sensitivity even if 

the analog outputs are not being used. The 

Sensitivity determines the resolution of the 

numeric readouts and bar graphs.

[Auto Scale] will adjust the Sensitivity

automatically.

9. Press and hold the <CH1 Offset> knob (above 

the CH1 BNC) to display the offset keypad.

X, Y and R may all be offset, ratioed, and 

expanded separately.

Since CH1 is set to X (indicated by the X LED

above the [Select] key) the <CH1 Offset> knob 

and [Expand] key above the CH1 BNC set the 

X offset and expand.

The [CH1 Select] key determines which 

quantity (X or R) is offset, ratioed, or expanded,

and output on the BNC.

The ratio function is described later in this 

manual, in the Operation chapter. Here we will 

explore offset and expand.

10. Touch {Auto} in the offset keypad screen. Auto Offset automatically adjusts the X offset 

(or Y or R) such that X (or Y or R) becomes 

zero. In this case, X is offset to zero. The offset 

should be about 100%. Offsets are set as a 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 23

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

percentage of the Sensitivity up to 999% (10×). 

Offsets are useful for making relative 

measurements.

Offsets can also be set using the keypad or 

<Offset> knob.

The offset affects the value of X and any 

outputs or displays of X. The DVM voltage 

should be zero in this case.

The Offset indicator turns on next to the <CH1 

Offset> knob. The X display on the screen has 

an ‘Ofst’ indication that the displayed quantity 

is affected by an offset. In this case, the bar 

graph and numeric value are both zero.

11. Touch {9}{0}{Enter} to set the offset to 90%. The X output (10 mV) is now 10% of the 

sensitivity (100 mV). The bar graph is at 10% 

and the DVM reads 1 V.

Notice that the trace of X (green) is a line 

10 mV above zero (center). This is because the 

offset affects the value of X (unlike the 

sensitivity).

12. Press the <CH1 Offset> knob briefly once to 

turn the X offset off.

The offset for CH1 can be turned on and off 

without changing the offset value. Notice how 

the trace of X changes when the offset is turned 

off.

Press it again to turn it back on. Leave the X offset on for now.

13. Press [CH1 Expand] once to select ×10. Expand ×10 effectively decreases the sensitivity

by 10 after the offset is applied.

Offset Expand 10V

Sensitivity

X CH1 × × 













 = −

Now, X = 100 mV, Sensitivity = 100 mV, the 

offset is 90% and the expand is ×10. Thus the 

DVM reads 10 V.

The X bar graph is now at 100% and the 

numeric readout has added resolution. The X 

display has an ‘Expd’ indication that the 

displayed quantity is affected by a non-unity 

expand.

Expand increases the resolution of the X 

display and CH1 output. Note that the trace of 

X is unaffected by expand. This is because 

expand does not change the value of X.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
24 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

14. Press [CH1 Expand] once to select ×100. The red output Overload LED lights and a 

‘Scale’ overload is indicated in the X display. 

This is because CH1 is trying to reach 100 V 

(10 times the previous DVM reading). Since the 

CH1 output is limited to 10 V, the output is 

overloaded. This has no affect on the value of X 

and the trace is unchanged. The bar graph and 

displayed value are pinned however.

15. Press [CH1 Expand] once to turn off expand.

Press the <CH1 Offset> knob briefly once to 

turn the X offset off.

The X display returns to 100 mV, 100% bar 

graph and 10 V CH1 output. The X graph is a 

line at 100 mV 2 divisions above center.

With offset and expand, the output voltage gain 

and offset can be programmed to provide 

control of feedback signals with the proper bias 

and gain for a variety of situations.

Offsets add and subtract from the values of X, 

Y and R.

Expand increases the resolution of the displays 

and analog outputs but does not change the 

values of X, Y and R.

16. Touch the green scale tile {X} to display its 

scale palette.

Touch to auto scale the green X trace.

When using the strip chart graph exclusively, 

there is no need to use offset or expand to zoom 

in on the data. Simply auto scale the data 

channel to graphically offset and expand the 

chart data.

See the Outputs and Scales discussion in the 

next chapter for more detailed information on 

output scaling

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 25

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Saving and Recalling Setups

The SR865 can store 8 complete instrument setups in non-volatile memory.

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Press and hold [Calc/system] to display the 

system menu.

First let’s set the SR865 clock.

The system menu is where instrument 

parameters (not measurement parameters) are 

set. This includes file numbering, interface 

settings and software updates.

3. Touch the {h} button in the Time section to 

highlight the hours setting. Use the keypad to set 

the hour of day in 24 hour format. The time/date 

will highlight in orange indicating that the 

displayed time is not the current time but rather 

the time to be set.

Continue to enter the minutes, seconds then 

touch {Time set} to commit the time to the 

internal clock.

Set the date in the same manner touching {Date 

set] to commit the date.

The time and date are used to label data files, 

screen shots, and saved settings.

4. Press [Sensitivity Down] 3 times to select 

100 mV.

Press [Time Constant Up] twice to select 1 s.

Let’s change the lock-in setup so that we have a 

non-default setup to save.

Change the Sensitivity, Time Constant and 

Filter Slope.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
26 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Press [Filter Slope] once to select 12 dB/oct.

5. Press [Save Recall] to display the Save/Recall 

screen.

The SR865 can store 8 complete setups. In 

addition the default setup can be recalled.

6. Touch the {Save} button next to the large tile 

labelled ‘1’.

Enter a name for this setup using the keypad.

Touch {Confirm} to commit the current setup to 

location 1.

Setups are numbered 1 through 8. Setups should 

be named so they are easily distinguished.

7. Now change the Sensitivity, Time Constant and 

Filter Slope to new settings.

Change the lock-in setup before recalling the 

saved settings.

8. Press [Save Recall] to display the Save/Recall 

screen again.

Note that the Location 1 tile displays the setup 

name and the time and date it was created. This 

makes it easier to recall the correct setup.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 27

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

9. Touch {Recall} for Location 1. A summary of settings which will change upon 

recall is shown.

Simply touch {Cancel} to skip recalling this 

setup.

Touch {Confirm} to recall the setup and dismiss 

this screen.

The Sensitivity, Time Constant and Filter Slope 

should all return to the saved settings.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
28 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Aux Outputs and Inputs

This measurement is designed to illustrate the use of the Aux Outputs and Inputs on the rear panel. You 

will need BNC cables and a digital voltmeter (DVM).

Specifically, you will set the Aux Output voltages and measure them with the DVM. These outputs will 

then be connected to the Aux Inputs to simulate external dc voltages which the lock-in can measure.

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Connect Aux Out 1 on the rear panel to the 

DVM. Set the DVM to read dc volts.

The 4 Aux Outputs can provide programmable 

voltages between −10.5 and +10.5 volts. The 

outputs can be set from the front panel or via 

the computer interface.

3. Press [Aux Output] to show the Aux Output 

keypad.

Aux Outputs are easily set from the front panel.

4. Touch {1}{0}{Enter} to set Aux 1 to 10.000 V. The DVM should display 10.00 V.

Use the <Cursor> knob adjust the level to 

5.000 V.

The <Cursor> knob is used to adjust values 

when the Aux Output keypad is shown.

The DVM should display 5.00 V.

The 4 Aux Outputs are useful for controlling 

other parameters in an experiment, such as 

pressure, temperature, wavelength, etc.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 29

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

5. Touch [Screen Layout] multiple times to show 

the full numeric display screen.

Note the 4 Aux Output values are displayed in 

white tiles across the bottom. Touching an 

output tile will display the Aux Output keypad.

This screen displays the 4 Aux Input readings 

along with the 4 lock-in data channels. The Aux 

Inputs are always scaled to 10 V.

The Aux Inputs can read 4 analog voltages. 

These inputs are useful for monitoring and 

measuring other parameters in an experiment, 

such as pressure, temperature, position, etc.

6. Disconnect the DVM from Aux Out 1. Connect 

Aux Out 1 to Aux In 1 on the rear panel.

We'll use Aux Out 1 to provide an analog 

voltage to measure.

Aux In 1 should now read 5.000 V.

The Aux Inputs can be assigned to a data 

channel and graphed on the strip chart 

alongside lock-in outputs. Use the [Config] key 

to change a data channel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
30 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Scanning

This measurement is designed to use the internal oscillator and an external signal source to explore some 

of the display types. You will need a synthesized function generator capable of providing a 500 mVrms 

sine wave at 100.000 kHz, BNC cables and a terminator appropriate for the generator function output.

Specifically, you will scan the lock-in internal reference frequency through the signal frequency. 

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Turn on the function generator, set the frequency 

to 100.000 kHz (exactly) and the amplitude to 

500 mVrms.

Connect the function output (sine wave) from 

the synthesized function generator to the A input 

using a BNC cable and appropriate terminator.

The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. 

The generator may require a terminator. Many 

generators have either a 50Ω or 600Ω output 

impedance. Use the appropriate feedthrough or 

T termination if necessary. In general, not using 

a terminator means that the function output 

amplitude will not agree with the generator 

setting.

The internal oscillator should be very close to 

the actual generator frequency. The X (green) 

and Y (blue) displays should read values which 

change slowly. The lock-in and the generator 

are not phase locked but they are at the same 

frequency with some slowly changing θ 

(orange). The signal magnitude R (yellow) is 

phase independent and does not change.

3. Press and hold [Scan/setup] to display the scan 

menu.

Parameters which may be scanned are Finternal, 

Amplitude, DC Level, Aux Out 1 and 2.

Scans can be linear or logarithmic, repeat, 

repeat up and down or run once and pause.

The Scan Duration is the total time to move 

from the Begin Value to the End Value. The 

Parameter Update Interval is the time spent at 

each scan step along the way. The shorter the 

update time, the smaller the steps and the 

smoother the scan. The longer the update time, 

the fewer steps. With experiments that take time 

to settle after a parameter change, it can be

beneficial to set the update time long enough to 

accommodate the settling.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 31

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

4. Let’s leave the Scan Parameter at internal 

reference frequency.

Touch {Begin Value} to highlight the start 

frequency. Enter 99.990 kHz.

Touch {End Value} to highlight the stop 

frequency. Enter 100.010 kHz.

Let’s scan a 20 Hz span around the signal 

frequency (100.000 kHz).

This setup will increase the internal frequency 

from 99.990 kHz to 100.010 kHz. To reverse 

the scan, simply reverse the begin and end 

values.

5. Touch {End Mode} once to select Repeat. This will repeat the scan over and over jumping 

from the end value back to the begin value at

the end of each scan.

6. Touch {Close} to return to the Trend Graphs. The lock-in frequency has not been changed, 

we have only configured a scan. The scan has 

not been started.

7. Press [Scan/setup] briefly (don’t hold it) to turn 

on the scan.

The Ready LED turns on indicating that the 

scan is ready (at the start value). In this case, 

the internal frequency (in the info bar at the top) 

is shown in orange indicating that it is under 

scan control. At this time, the frequency is the 

start value or 99.9900 kHz.

8. Press [Play Pause/reset] briefly (don’t hold it) to 

start the scan.

The Run LED turns on indicating that the scan 

is running.

The internal frequency starts scanning up. The 

current value is shown in orange in the info bar. 

When the end value is reached, the scan resets 

to the beginning value and repeats.

The trend graphs show a resonance as the 

internal frequency passes through 100.000 kHz. 

This is because the difference between the fsignal

and finternal gets slower as the finternal approaches 

fsignal and then gets faster after it passes fsignal. 

The time constant attenuates this difference 

frequency when it is large.

9. Press [Screen Layout] once to show the full 

screen strip chart.

Touch the white scale tile {Time} to display the 

horizontal scale palette (bottom right of screen).

Touch repeatedly to zoom out to 10 S/div.

It is much easier to visualize a scan using the 

strip charts since the chart time scale can be 

matched to the scan time.

This scan takes 1m40s or 100 s so a chart span 

of 100 s will display an entire scan.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
32 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

10. Touch the green scale tile {X} to display its 

scale palette. Touch to dismiss the X trace.

Touch the blue scale tile {Y} to display its scale 

palette. Touch to dismiss the Y trace.

Let’s clean up the chart by dismissing the X and 

Y traces.

11. Touch the yellow scale tile {R} to display its 

scale palette. Touch to auto scale the R 

trace.

Touch the orange scale tile {θ} to display its 

scale palette. Touch to repeatedly to change 

the scale to 200 deg/div.

The magnitude trace (R) shows the lock-in 

response as the internal frequency scans 

through the signal frequency at this time 

constant and filter.

Reduce the phase trace to see the resonance at 

100.000 kHz.

12. Press [Config] to change the assignments of the 

data channels.

Touch {Data 2 Display} (the blue display) to 

highlight the channel 2 data source. Touch 

{Fint} from the keypad below.

Touch {Close} to return to the strip chart.

It would be nice to show the frequency on the 

graph.

The 4 data channels can be assigned to different 

parameters in the Config screen.

Any data channel can be assigned any of the 

sources in the keypad.

When the Config screen is closed the strip chart 

does not display a blue trace. This is because 

we dismissed it previously.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 33

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

13. Touch the blue scale tile {Fi} to display its scale 

palette.

Touch to auto scale the blue F trace.

Simply touching the blue scale tile turns the 

blue trace back on and displays its scale palette.

The blue frequency trace shows the upward 

scan of the frequency spanning 4 divisions or 

20 Hz.

14. Touch the white scale tile {Time} to display the 

horizontal scale palette (bottom right of screen).

Touch repeatedly to zoom out a few times.

Since the scan End Mode is set to repeat, we

see the scan repeat over and over in the history.

When scanning, it is convenient to pause the 

strip chart at the end of the scan to review the 

results.

15. Press and hold [Scan/setup] to display the scan 

menu again.

Touch {End Mode} multiple times to select 

Once.

Touch {Close} to return to the strip chart.

When the End Mode is Once, then the scan 

stops at the end value and the strip chart is 

paused.

16. Press [Scan/setup] briefly (don’t hold it) to turn 

the scan off, then press [Scan/setup] briefly 

again to re-arm. 

Changes to the scan setup do not affect a 

currently-running scan. We stop the scan and 

then start a new one by cycling the [Scan/setup] 

button; the Ready LED goes off and then on.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
34 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

17. Press [Play Pause/reset] briefly (don’t hold it) to 

re-start the scan.

The Run LED turns on indicating that the scan 

is running.

18. Touch the white scale tile {Time} to display the 

horizontal scale palette (bottom right of screen).

Touch repeatedly to zoom in to 10 S/div.

Touch the highlighted white scale tile again to 

dismiss the scale palette.

This scan is 100 s in length so set the graph to 

10 divisions of 10 s to show a complete scan.

Wait for the scan to finish. When the scan finishes, the Done LED turns 

on.

19. Use the <Cursor> knob to move the cursor to the 

peak of R (yellow).

When the scan in progress reaches the end 

value the strip chart pauses.

The frequency will hold at the end value 

(100.010 kHz) as displayed in the info bar.

The cursor is active when the strip chart is 

paused.

20. Touch the white scale tile {Time} to display the 

horizontal scale palette (bottom right of screen).

Touch start the strip chart again.

Touch the highlighted white scale tile again to 

dismiss the scale palette.

Notice that data collection continued while the 

chart was paused. Restarting the chart realigns 

the time history so the current time is the right 

edge again.

In this case, the frequency has been constant at 

100.010 kHz the entire time we have been 

examining the paused scan.

21. Press and hold [Play Pause/reset] to reset the 

scan back to the begin value.

This resets the scan parameter back to the begin 

value. The Done LED turns off.

22. Press [Play Pause/reset] briefly to start the scan 

again.

This starts the scan again. The Run LED turns 

on and the frequency ramps upward.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 1 Getting Started 35

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

While the scan is in progress, press [Scan/setup] 

briefly to turn scanning off.

Turn the scan off before the end and the internal 

frequency returns to its original value 

(100.000 kHz) as shown in white in the info 

bar.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
36 Getting Started Chapter 1

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Basics 37

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Chapter 2 

Lock-in Amplifier Basics

What is a Lock-in Amplifier?

Lock-in amplifiers are used to detect and measure very small ac signals — all the way 

down to a few nanovolts. Accurate measurements may be made even when the small 

signal is obscured by noise sources many thousands of times larger.

Lock-in amplifiers use a technique known as phase-sensitive detection to single out the 

component of the signal at a specific reference frequency and phase. Noise signals at 

frequencies other than the reference frequency are rejected and do not affect the 

measurement.

Why use a lock-in?

Let's consider an example. Suppose the signal is a 10 nV sine wave at 10 kHz. Clearly 

some amplification is required. A good low noise amplifier may have about 5 nV/√Hz of 

input noise. If the amplifier bandwidth is 100 kHz and the gain is 1000, then we can 

expect our output to be 10 μV of signal (10 nV × 1000) and 1.6 mV of broadband noise 

(5 nV/√Hz × √100 kHz × 1000). We won't have much luck measuring the output signal 

unless we single out the frequency of interest.

If we follow the amplifier with a band pass filter with a Q=100 (a very good filter) 

centered at 10 kHz, any signal in a 100 Hz bandwidth will be detected (10 kHz/Q). The 

noise in the filter pass band will be 50 μV (5 nV/√Hz × √100 Hz × 1000) and the signal 

will still be 10 μV. The output noise is still much greater than the signal and an accurate 

measurement cannot be made. Further gain will not help the signal to noise problem.

Now try following the amplifier with a phase-sensitive detector (PSD). The PSD can 

detect the signal at 10 kHz with a bandwidth as narrow as 0.01 Hz! In this case, the noise 

in the detection bandwidth will be only 0.5 μV (5 nV/√Hz × √.01 Hz × 1000) while the 

signal is still 10 μV. The signal to noise ratio is now 20 and an accurate measurement of 

the signal is possible.

What is phase-sensitive detection?

Lock-in measurements require a frequency reference. Typically an experiment is excited 

at a fixed frequency (from an oscillator or function generator) and the lock-in detects the 

response from the experiment at the reference frequency. In the diagram below, the 

reference signal is a square wave at frequency fref. This might be the sync output from a 

function generator. If the sine output from the function generator is used to excite the 

experiment, the response might be the signal waveform shown below. The signal is 

Vsigsin(ωref t + θsig) where ωref = 2πfref and Vsig is the signal amplitude.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
38 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The SR865 generates its own sine wave at frequency fL, shown as the lock-in reference 

below. The lock-in reference is sin(ωLt + θref) where ωL = 2πfL. 

The SR865 amplifies the signal and then multiplies it by the lock-in reference using a 

phase-sensitive detector (PSD) or multiplier. The output of the PSD is simply the product 

of two sine waves.

Vpsd = Vsig sin(ωrt + θsig) sin(ωLt + θref)

= 1/2 Vsig cos([ωr − ωL]t + θsig − θref) −

1/2 Vsig cos([ωr + ωL]t + θsig + θref)

The PSD output is two ac signals, one at the difference frequency (ωr − ωL) and the other 

at the sum frequency (ωr + ωL).

If the PSD output is passed through a low pass filter, the ac signals are removed. What 

will be left? In the general case, nothing. However, if ωr equals ωL, the difference 

frequency component will be a dc signal. In this case, the filtered PSD output will be

Vpsd = 1/2 Vsig cos(θsig − θref)

This is a very nice signal — it is a dc signal proportional to the signal amplitude. 

Narrow band detection

Now suppose the input is made up of signal plus noise. The PSD and low pass filter only 

detect signals whose frequencies are very close to the lock-in reference frequency. Noise 

signals at frequencies far from the reference are attenuated at the PSD output by the low 

pass filter (neither ωnoise − ωref nor ωnoise + ωref are close to dc). Noise at frequencies very 

close to the reference frequency will result in very low frequency ac outputs from the 

PSD (|ωnoise − ωref| is small). Their attenuation depends upon the low pass filter bandwidth 

and roll-off. A narrower bandwidth will remove noise sources very close to the reference 

frequency, a wider bandwidth allows these signals to pass. The low pass filter bandwidth 

determines the bandwidth of detection. Only the signal at the reference frequency will 

Lock-in Reference

External Reference

θsig

θref

Signal

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 39

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

result in a true dc output and be unaffected by the low pass filter. This is the signal we 

want to measure.

Where does the lock-in reference come from?

We need to make the lock-in reference the same as the signal frequency, i.e. ωr = ωL. Not 

only do the frequencies have to be the same, the phase between the signals cannot change 

with time, otherwise cos(θsig − θref) will change and Vpsd will not be a dc signal. In other 

words, the lock-in reference needs to be phase-locked to the signal reference. 

Lock-in amplifiers use a phase-locked loop (PLL) to generate the reference signal. An 

external reference signal (in this case, the reference square wave) is provided to the lockin. The PLL in the lock-in “locks” the internal reference oscillator to this external 

reference, resulting in a reference sine wave at ωr with a fixed phase shift of θref. Since 

the PLL actively tracks the external reference, changes in the external reference

frequency do not affect the measurement.

All lock-in measurements require a reference signal 

In this case, the reference is provided by the excitation source (the function generator). 

This is called an external reference source. In many situations, the lock-in’s internal 

oscillator may be used instead. The internal oscillator is just like a function generator 

(with variable sine output and a TTL sync) which is always phase-locked to the reference 

oscillator.

Magnitude and phase

Remember that the PSD output is proportional to Vsigcosθ where θ = (θsig − θref). θ is the 

phase difference between the signal and the lock-in reference oscillator. By adjusting θref

we can make θ equal to zero, in which case we can measure Vsig (cosθ = 1). Conversely, 

if θ is 90°, there will be no output at all. A lock-in with a single PSD is called a singlephase lock-in and its output is Vsigcosθ.

This phase dependency can be eliminated by adding a second PSD. If the second PSD 

multiplies the signal with the reference oscillator shifted by 90°, i.e. sin(ωLt + θref + 90°), 

its low pass filtered output will be

Vpsd2 = 1/2 Vsig sin(θsig − θref)

Vpsd2 ~ Vsig sinθ

Now we have two outputs, one proportional to cosθ and the other proportional to sinθ. If 

we call the first output X and the second Y,

X = Vsig cosθ Y = Vsig sinθ

these two quantities represent the signal as a vector relative to the lock-in reference 

oscillator. X is called the 'in-phase' component and Y the 'quadrature' component. This is 

because when θ = 0, X measures the signal while Y is zero.

By computing the magnitude (R) of the signal vector, the phase dependency is removed.

R = (X2 + Y2

)

1/2 = Vsig

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
40 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

R measures the signal amplitude and does not depend upon the phase between the signal 

and lock-in reference.

A dual-phase lock-in, such as the SR865, has two PSD's, with reference oscillators 90° 

apart, and can measure X, Y and R directly. In addition, the phase θ between the signal 

and lock-in reference, can be measured according to

θ = tan−1 (Y/X)

What Does a Lock-in Measure?

So what exactly does the SR865 measure? Fourier's theorem basically states that any 

input signal can be represented as the sum of many sine waves of differing amplitudes, 

frequencies and phases. This is generally considered as representing the signal in the 

“frequency domain”. Normal oscilloscopes display the signal in the “time domain”. 

Except in the case of clean sine waves, the time domain representation does not convey 

very much information about the various frequencies that make up the signal.

What does the SR865 measure? 

The SR865 multiplies the input signal by a pure sine wave at the reference frequency. All 

components of the input signal are multiplied by the reference simultaneously. 

Mathematically speaking, sine waves of differing frequencies are orthogonal, i.e. the 

average of the product of two sine waves is zero unless the frequencies are exactly the 

same. In the SR865, the product of this multiplication yields a dc output signal 

proportional to the component of the signal whose frequency is exactly locked to the 

reference frequency. The low pass filter which follows the multiplier provides the 

averaging which removes the products of the reference with components at all other 

frequencies.

The SR865, because it multiplies the signal with a pure sine wave, measures the single 

Fourier (sine) component of the signal at the reference frequency. Let's take a look at an 

example. Suppose the input signal is a simple square wave at frequency f. The square 

wave is actually composed of many sine waves at multiples of f with carefully related 

amplitudes and phases. A 2V pk–pk square wave can be expressed as

S(t) = 1.273 sin(ωt) + 0.4244 sin(3ωt) + 0.2546 sin(5ωt) + ...

where ω = 2πf. The SR865, locked to f will single out the first component. The measured 

signal will be 1.273 sin(ωt), not the 2V pk–pk that you'd measure on a scope.

In the general case, the input consists of signal plus noise. Noise is represented as varying 

signals at all frequencies. The ideal lock-in only responds to noise at the reference 

frequency. Noise at other frequencies is removed by the low pass filter following the 

multiplier. This “bandwidth narrowing” is the primary advantage that a lock-in amplifier 

provides. Only inputs at the reference frequency result in an output.

RMS or Peak?

Lock-in amplifiers as a general rule display the input signal in Volts RMS. When the 

SR865 displays a magnitude of 1V (rms), the component of the input signal at the 

reference frequency is a sine wave with an amplitude of 1 Vrms or 2.8 V pk–pk.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 41

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Thus, in the previous example with a 2 V pk–pk square wave input, the SR865 would 

detect the first sine component, 1.273 sin(ωt). The measured and displayed magnitude 

would be 0.90 V (rms), e.g. 1.273/√2.

Degrees or Radians?

In this discussion, frequencies have been referred to as f (Hz) and ω (2πf radians/sec). 

This is because people measure frequencies in cycles per second and math works best in 

radians. For purposes of measurement, frequencies as measured in a lock-in amplifier are 

in Hz. The equations used to explain the actual calculations are sometimes written using 

ω to simplify the expressions. 

Phase is always reported in degrees. Once again, this is by custom. Equations written as 

sin(ωt + θ) are written as if θ is in radians mostly for simplicity. Lock-in amplifiers 

always manipulate and measure phase in degrees.

Block diagram

A simplified block diagram of the SR865’s lock-in circuit is shown below and explained 

in the following sections.

A input

Ref in

Timebase

in

Timebase

out

BlazeX

out

10 MHz

crystal Clock

generator

RC

Filter

RC

Filter

Gain/

Offset/

Expand

Annenuator

R, θ

Calc

FIR

Filter

IIR

Filter Sync

Filter

PLL

Internal

oscillator

Phase

locked

loop

X PSD

Y PSD

10kΩ

50Ω

1MΩ

1kΩ

10Ω

100Ω

B input

I input

Signal

monitor

Gnd/

Float

50Ω/1MΩ

Range

Virtual

ground

x0.1,

x0.3,

...x100

A/A–B

AC/DC couple

Sensitivity

Sine/TTL

Input

Range

Differential

amplifier

Digital signal processor

Reference input

Timebase input

Signal input

Low pass filters

X out

R

X

BlazeX

Sync

Sine

+

–

10 MHz

Y

θ

Sine

out

Y out

Ch 1 out

Ch 2 out

RC

Filter

90°

phase

shift

FIR

Filter

IIR

Filter Sync

Filter

ADC

ADC

DAC

DAC

DAC

DAC

DAC

DAC

CPU System

clock

θref

phase

shift

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
42 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The Reference Oscillator

A lock-in amplifier requires a reference oscillator phase-locked to the signal frequency. 

In general, this is accomplished by phase-locking an internal oscillator to an externally 

provided reference signal. This reference signal usually comes from the signal source that

is providing the excitation to the experiment. 

Reference Input

The SR865 reference input can trigger on an analog signal (like a sine wave) or a TTL 

logic signal. The first case is called External Sine. The input is ac coupled (above 1 Hz) 

and the input impedance is 1 MΩ. A sine wave input greater than 200 mV pk is required. 

Positive zero crossings are detected and considered to be the zero for the reference phase 

shift.

TTL reference signals can be used at all frequencies up to 2.5 MHz. For frequencies 

below 1 Hz, a TTL reference signal is required. Many function generators provide a 

TTL SYNC output which can be used as the reference. This is convenient since the 

generator's sine output might be smaller than 200 mV or be varied in amplitude. The 

SYNC signal will provide a stable reference regardless of the sine amplitude.

When using a TTL reference, the reference input trigger can be set to Pos TTL (detect 

rising edges) or Neg TTL (detect falling edges). In each case, the internal oscillator is 

locked (at zero phase) to the detected edge.

Internal Oscillator

The internal oscillator in the SR865 is basically a 2.5 MHz function generator with sine 

and sync outputs. The oscillator generates a digitally synthesized sine wave. The internal 

oscillator sine wave is output differentially at the SINE OUT BNC’s on the front panel. 

An attenuator sets the amplitude of the output to a value between 1 nV and 2 V (rms).

When an external reference is used, this internal oscillator sine wave is phase-locked to 

the reference. The rising zero crossing is locked to the detected reference zero crossing or 

edge. In this mode, the SINE OUT provides a sine wave phase-locked to the external 

reference. Phase locking is accomplished digitally by the SR865.

The internal oscillator may be used without an external reference. In the Internal 

Reference mode the frequency is set in the lock-in and the SINE OUT provides the 

excitation for the experiment. The phase-locked-loop is not used in this mode.

The BlazeX output on the rear panel can be configured to provide the sync output. The 

internal oscillator's rising zero crossings are detected and the output is a square wave. 

Reference Oscillators and Phase

The internal oscillator sine wave is not the reference signal to the phase sensitive 

detectors. The SR865 computes a second sine wave, phase shifted by θref from the 

internal oscillator (and thus from an external reference), as the reference input to the X 

phase sensitive detector. This waveform is sin(ωrt + θref). The reference phase shift is 

adjustable in 0.001° increments. 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 43

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The input to the Y PSD is a third sine wave, computed by the SR865, shifted by 90° from 

the second sine wave. This waveform is sin(ωrt + θref + 90°).

The phase shifts (θref and the 90° shift) are exact numbers and accurate to better than 

0.000001°. Neither waveform is actually output in analog form since the phase sensitive 

detectors are actually digital multipliers inside the SR865.

Phase Jitter

When an external reference is used, the phase-locked loop contributes a little phase jitter. 

The internal oscillator is supposed to be locked with zero phase shift relative to the 

external reference. Phase jitter means that the average phase shift is zero but the 

instantaneous phase shift has a few microdegrees or millidegrees of noise. This shows up 

at the output as noise in phase or quadrature measurements.

Phase noise can also cause noise to appear at the X and Y outputs. This is because a 

reference oscillator with a lot of phase noise is the same as a reference whose frequency 

spectrum is spread out. That is, the reference is not a single frequency, but a distribution 

of frequencies about the true reference frequency. These spurious frequencies are 

attenuated quite a bit but can still cause problems. The spurious reference frequencies 

result in signals close to the reference being detected. Noise at nearby frequencies now 

appears near dc and affects the lock-in output.

Phase noise in the SR865 is very low and generally causes no problems. In applications 

requiring no phase jitter, the internal reference mode should be used. Since there is no 

PLL, the internal oscillator and the reference sine waves are directly linked and there is 

no jitter in the measured phase. (Actually, the phase jitter is the phase noise of a crystal 

oscillator and is very, very small).

Harmonic Detection

It is possible to compute the two PSD reference sine waves at a multiple of the internal 

oscillator frequency. In this case, the lock-in detects signals at N× fref which are 

synchronous with the reference. The SINE OUT frequency is not affected. The SR865 

can detect at any harmonic up to N=99 as long as N × fref does not exceed 2.5 MHz.

The Phase Sensitive Detectors

The amplified input signal is converted to digital form using A/D converter sampling at 

10 MHz. The SR865 then multiplies the signal with the reference sine wave digitally. 

The dynamic reserve is limited by the quality of the A/D conversion. Once the input 

signal is digitized, no further errors are introduced. Certainly the accuracy of the 

multiplication does not depend on the size of the numbers. The A/D converter used in the 

SR865 is extremely linear, meaning that the presence of large noise signals does not 

impair its ability to correctly digitize a small signal. In fact, the dynamic reserve of the 

SR865 can exceed 120 dB without any problems. We'll talk more about dynamic reserve 

a little later.

We've discussed how the digital signal processor in the SR865 computes the internal 

oscillator and two reference sine waves and handles both phase sensitive detectors. In the 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
44 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

next section, we'll see how the SR865 performs the low pass filtering and dc 

amplification required at the output of the PSD's.

Time Constants and Sensitivity

Remember, the output of the PSD contains many signals. Most of the output signals have 

frequencies which are either the sum or difference between an input signal frequency and 

the reference frequency. Only the component of the input signal whose frequency is 

exactly equal to the reference frequency will result in a dc output.

The low pass filter at the PSD output removes all of the unwanted ac signals, both the 2f

(sum of the signal and the reference) and the noise components. This filter is what makes 

the lock-in such a narrow band detector.

RC filters

Traditionally, the time constant setting of a lock-in amplifier determines the bandwidth of 

an RC lowpass filter. The time constant is simply 1/2πf where f is the −3 dB frequency of 

the filter. The low pass filters are simple 6 dB/octave roll off, RC type filters. A 1 second 

time constant referred to a filter whose −3 dB point occurred at 0.16 Hz and rolled off at 

6 dB/octave beyond 0.16 Hz. Typically, there are two successive filters so that the overall 

filter can roll off at either 6 dB or 12 dB per octave. The time constant referred to the 

−3 dB point of each filter alone, not the combined filter.

The notion of time constant arises from the fact that the actual output is supposed to be a 

dc signal. In fact, when there is noise at the input, there is noise on the output. By 

increasing the time constant, the output becomes more steady and easier to measure 

reliably. The tradeoff comes when real changes in the input signal take many time 

constants to be reflected at the output. This is because a single RC filter requires about 5 

time constants to settle to its final value. The time constant reflects how slowly the output 

responds, and thus the degree of output smoothing.

The time constant also determines the equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) for noise 

measurements. The ENBW is not the filter −3 dB pole, it is the effective bandwidth for 

Gaussian noise. More about this later.

The digital signal processing in the SR865 handles all of the low pass filtering. Each PSD 

can be followed by up to four filter stages for up to 24 dB/oct of roll off. 

Why are multiple filter stages desirable? Consider an example where the reference is at 1 

kHz and a large noise signal is at 1.05 kHz. The PSD noise outputs are at 50 Hz 

(difference) and 2.05 kHz (sum). Clearly the 50 Hz component is the more difficult to 

low pass filter. If the noise signal is 80 dB above the full scale signal and we would like

to measure the signal to 1% (−40 dB), then the 50 Hz component needs to be reduced by 

120 dB. To do this in two stages would require a time constant of at least 3 seconds. To 

accomplish the same attenuation in four stages only requires 100 ms of time constant. In 

the second case, the output will respond 30 times faster and the experiment will take less 

time.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 45

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Advanced Filters

The SR865 also provides advanced filtering in place of the traditional 6dB/octave RC 

filters. These filters can provide digital filtering that has no analog filter counterpart, and 

can settle up to twice as quickly as corresponding RC filters. If the input signal is 

changing rapidly, or if there is significant noise away from the reference frequency, then 

the advanced filters often provide better signal to noise with faster output response. See 

Appendix A for more information.

Floating Point Math in the SR865

The output points of the digital PSD in the SR865 are converted into floating point 

numbers. These numbers reflect the actual analog signal gain preceding the analog to 

digital converter and are simply the signal input voltages at the input BNC’s. All digital 

filtering except for the Sync filter (described below) is performed using floating point 

math.

The SR865 plots these floating point outputs in the strip chart displays in units of Volts

(or Amps) referred to the signal inputs. These values have no real limit in size (either too 

small or too large) and do not overload.

Sensitivity

So how does the SR865 provide an analog output proportional to the signal when the 

result is a floating point value that can range between 10−20 to 1020, while the analog 

output can only range between +10V and −10V?

The answer is that the user must set a Sensitivity which sets the output voltage

corresponding to full scale (10 V) at the output BNC. The Sensitivity also sets the scale 

for the displayed bar graphs and numerical readouts of X, Y and R. Note that this is a 

numerical output conversion. Output overloads do not affect the actual measurement 

results. They only indicate that the output value exceeds 100% of the chosen Sensitivity

and the output BNC, the bar graph and the displayed numerical readout will be pinned at 

their maximums. The results displayed on the strip charts or available over the computer 

interfaces are the floating point outputs and are unaffected by output overloads.

The Sensitivity is chosen to conveniently and accurately display the measurement results 

on the output BNC, the bar graph and the numerical readout. The Sensitivity, however,

must be chosen appropriately when using synchronous filters (see below).

Synchronous Filters

Even if the input signal has no noise, the PSD output always contains a component at 2f 

(sum frequency of signal and reference) whose amplitude equals or exceeds the desired 

dc output depending upon the phase. At low frequencies, the time constant required to

attenuate the 2f component can be quite long. For example, at 1 Hz, the 2f output is at 2 

Hz and to attenuate the 2 Hz by 60 dB in two stages requires a time constant of 3 

seconds.

A synchronous filter, on the other hand, operates totally differently. The PSD output is 

averaged over a complete cycle of the reference frequency. The result is that all 

components at multiples of the reference (2f included) are notched out completely. In the 

case of a clean signal, almost no additional filtering would be required. This is 

increasingly useful the lower the reference frequency. Imagine what time constant would 

be needed at 0.001 Hz!

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
46 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

In the SR865, synchronous filters are available at detection frequencies up to 4.8 kHz. At 

higher frequencies, synchronous filters are not required because 2f is easily removed with 

the other lowpass filters. The synchronous filter is applied after the other lowpass filters 

have removed the noise components from the PSD output leaving, just the synchronous 

signals for the synchronous filter to remove. This combination of filters removes all 

multiples of the reference frequency and provides overall noise attenuation as well.

Synchronous Filters and Sensitivity

It is important to note that the synchronous filter requires the Sensitivity to be set 

appropriately. This is because the synchronous filter is an integer filter and requires the 

floating point output to be converted to integer values. This conversion is based upon the 

Sensitivity. The output of the synchronous filter is then converted back to floating point. 

Choose a Sensitivity as if you will be using the analog X and Y outputs. This will 

typically result in the optimum scale. If the Sync filters are overloaded, the Sync error 

indicators on the display will light.

Outputs and Scales

The SR865 has X and Y outputs on the rear panel and Channel 1 and 2 (CH1 and CH2) 

outputs on the front panel. 

X and Y Rear Panel Outputs

The X and Y rear panel outputs are the outputs from the two phase sensitive detectors 

with low pass filtering, offset and expand. These outputs are the traditional outputs of an 

analog lock-in. The X and Y outputs update at 2.0 MHz.

CH1 and CH2 Front Panel Outputs

The two front panel outputs can be configured to output voltages proportional to X or R 

and Y or θ. These outputs update at 2.0 MHz.

If the outputs are set to X or Y, these outputs duplicate the rear panel outputs. 

X, Y, R and θ Output Scales

The Sensitivity setting of the SR865 determines what input signal corresponds to 10 V 

full scale output for X, Y and R. For example, a Sensitivity of 100 mV means that a 

signal at fref of 100 mVrms will result in a 10 V output of R. X and Y will reach a 

maximum of 10 V, and a minimum of –10 V, depending upon the phase of the signal.

The Sensitivity also sets the scale for the displayed bar graphs and numeric readouts.

If the signal input exceeds the sensitivity, the outputs will overload. The actual 

measurement is typically unaffected since it is done in floating point and has no overload. 

The data displayed in the chart will still be accurate, provided the Sync filter is not 

overloaded.

Lock-in amplifiers are designed to measure the RMS value of the ac input signal. All 

values of X, Y and R outputs and displays are RMS values.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 47

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

θ ranges from −180° to +180° regardless of the sensitivity or range. When CH2 outputs a 

voltage proportional to θ, the output scale is 18°/Volt or 180°=10 V. The phase bar graph 

and numeric readout scales are also unaffected by the Sensitivity.

X, Y and R Output Offset, Ratio and Expand

The SR865 has the ability to offset the X, Y and R outputs. This is useful when 

measuring deviations in the signal around some nominal value. The offset can be set so 

that the output is offset to zero. Changes in the output can then be read directly from the 

display or output voltages. The offset is specified as a percentage of the Sensitivity and 

the percentage does not change when the Sensitivity is changed. Offsets up to ±999% can 

be programmed.

The X, Y, and R outputs may also be rescaled with a ratio function. This allows signals to 

be normalized to some experimental parameter being monitored with an auxiliary input 

voltage. Whenever enabled, ratio is indicated by the RATIO LED and “Ratio” labels on 

the display.

The X, Y and R outputs may also be expanded. This simply takes the output (minus its 

offset) and multiplies by an expansion factor. Thus, a signal which is only 10% of 

sensitivity can be expanded to provide 10 V of output rather than only 1 V. The normal 

use for expand is to expand the measurement resolution around some value which is not 

zero. For example, suppose a signal has a nominal value of 0.9 mV and we want to 

measure small deviations, say 10 μV or so, in the signal. The Sensitivity of the lock-in is 

set to 1 mV to accommodate the nominal signal. If the offset is set to 90% of full scale, 

then the nominal 0.9 mV signal will result in a zero output. The 10 μV deviations in the 

signal only provide 100 mV of dc output. If the output is expanded by 10, these small 

deviations are magnified by 10 and provide outputs of 1 VDC.

The SR865 can expand the output by 10 or 100 provided the expanded output does not 

exceed 10 V. In the above example, the 10 μV deviations can be expanded by 100 times 

before they exceed full scale (at 1 mV Sensitivity).

The analog output with offset, ratio and expand is

Expand 10V

1.000 V

Ratio In

Offset

Sensitivity

X, Y, or R

Output × ×





























 





−

=

where Offset is a fraction of 1 (50%=0.5), Expand is 1, 10 or 100, and the output cannot 

exceed 10 V. When enabled, Ratio In is the voltage on either Aux 3(for X or Y) or Aux 4 

(for R); if disabled, the Ratio In factor is simply 1. In the above example (without ratio),

Output = (0.91mV/1mV − 0.9) × 10 × 10V = 1V

for a signal which is 10 μV greater than the 0.9 mV nominal. (Offset = 0.9 and 

expand = 10).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
48 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The X and Y offset, ratio and expand functions in the SR865 are output functions and do 

not affect the calculation of R or θ. R has its own output offset, ratio and expand. θ has no 

offset or ratio or expand capability. To offset θ, simply use Auto Phase.

X, Y and R Display Offset and Ratio

Output offsets and ratios are reflected in the displays. For example, when the X output is 

offset to zero, the displayed value will drop to zero also. This means that the bar graph 

and numeric readout both drop to zero. In addition if X is being charted on the graph, its 

graph will drop to zero. Any display which is showing a quantity which is affected by a 

non-zero offset will display a highlighted Offset indicator within its display. Similarly, 

any display which is showing a quantity affected by a non-unity ratio factor will display a 

highlighted Ratio indicator within its display. Remote queries of offset and/or ratioed

quantities are also affected by the offset or ratio.

X, Y and R Display Expand

Output expands do not increase the displayed numeric values of X, Y or R. Expand 

increases the resolution of the displayed X, Y or R numeric value. This is because the 

expand function increases the resolution of the output, not the size of the input signal. 

The displayed value will show an increased resolution but will continue to display the 

original value minus the offset. Any display which is showing a quantity which is 

affected by a non-unity expand will display a highlighted Expand indicator within its 

display.

Output expands affect the bar graphs. The bar graphs are simply a visualization of the 

BNC outputs and as such are expanded to provide more visual resolution.

Output expands do not affect the strip charts. The values being charted are already 

floating point numbers with all of the resolution available. The strip charts do reflect the 

offsets however.

What is Dynamic Reserve Really?

Suppose the lock-in input consists of a signal at fref plus noise at some other frequencies. 

The real world definition of dynamic reserve is the ratio of the largest noise signal to the 

actual signal (at fref). This ratio is usually expressed in dB. For example, if the fref signal is 

1 μV and the noise reaches 1 mV, then the dynamic reserve is 60 dB (noise is 1000 times 

the signal).

Dynamic reserve is therefore a property of the input signal generated by the experiment; 

that is, the ratio of noise to signal at the BNC is determined by factors outside the lock-in. 

It is the job of the lock-in to measure the signal to the best of its ability, whatever the 

ratio of noise to signal at the input. Of course, it is always better to have less noise and 

more signal!

Dynamic Reserve in the SR865

Unlike most lock-ins, the SR865 does not have a dynamic reserve setting. As mentioned 

above, the real world dynamic reserve is the noise to signal ratio at the input. The SR865 

is designed to achieve the best possible measurement as easily as possible.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 49

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

In the SR865 the only real gain is in the input amplifier, which amplifies the signal before

it reaches the A/D converter. After this point, the signal is processed digitally so there’s 

no further gain. Therefore, the only question is how to set the gain of the input amplifier.

In principle, the gain only needs to be high enough such that the input noise of the signal 

and the amplifier is greater than the input noise of the A/D converter. Increasing the 

analog gain beyond this point will not reduce the output noise.

Input Range

The Input Range sets the analog gain in the SR865. The settings reflect the largest signal 

at the input before the amplifier overloads. Setting the Input Range to a smaller value 

increases the analog gain. The signal strength LEDs on the front panel indicate how much 

of the A/D range is being used. The general rule is to decrease the Input Range as much 

as possible without overloading the amplifier. This increases the A/D range used and 

optimizes the output noise performance of the lock-in. At an Input Range of 10 mV no 

additional gain is available since noise performance will not improve with more gain.

Remember, we have defined dynamic reserve as a property of the input signal generated 

by the experiment. The ratio of noise to signal at the BNC is determined by factors 

outside the lock-in. The Input Range must be set to accommodate the largest signal 

present at the input, whether it is at fref or is just noise. Once the Input Range is set, use 

the Time Constant filters to achieve the best results. Then set the Sensitivity to optimize 

the bar graphs and numeric displays as well as the X, Y and R outputs.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
50 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The Input Amplifier

A lock-in can measure signals as small as a few nanovolts. A low noise signal amplifier 

is required to boost the signal to a level where the A/D converter can digitize the signal 

without degrading the signal to noise. The analog gain in the SR865 ranges from roughly 

1 to 100. As discussed previously, higher gains do not improve signal to noise and are not 

necessary. The gain is set by the Input Range.

What is the Noise Floor?

The input noise of the SR865 signal amplifier is about 2.5 nVrms/√Hz. What does this 

noise figure mean? Let's set up an experiment. If the SR865’s Input Range is set to 

10 mV then the input gain is sufficient that the noise floor of the measurement is 

determined by the input noise. Suppose the PSD output is low pass filtered with a single 

RC filter (6 dB/oct roll off) with a time constant of 100 ms. What will be the noise floor 

of the measurement?

Amplifier input noise and Johnson noise of resistors are Gaussian in nature. That is, the 

amount of noise is proportional to the square root of the bandwidth in which the noise is 

measured. A single stage RC filter has an equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) of 1/(4T)

where T is the time constant (R×C). This means that Gaussian noise is filtered with an 

effective bandwidth equal to the ENBW. In this example, a single 100ms low-pass filter 

has an ENBW of 1/(4×100ms) or 2.5 Hz. Thus the lock-in noise floor will be 

2.5 nVrms/√Hz × √2.5Hz or ~4 nVrms. For Gaussian noise, the peak to peak noise is 

about 5 times the rms noise. Thus, the output will have about 20 nV pk–pk of noise.

Remember that the SR865 reports its measurements in Volts referred to the input BNC. 

In this case, the SR865 will appear to have 20 nV pk–pk of noise at fref at the input, with 

its input grounded and no signal even applied. If this noise floor is too large for your 

experiment, then you need to add more filter stages or increase the time constant to 

decrease the ENBW.

All of this assumes that the signal input is being driven from a low impedance source. 

Remember resistors have Johnson noise equal to 0.13×√RnVrms/√Hz. Even a 50Ω 

resistor has almost 1 nVrms/√Hz of noise. A signal source impedance of 400 Ω will have 

a Johnson noise greater than the SR865's input noise. To determine the overall noise of 

multiple noise sources, take the square root of the sum of the squares of the individual 

noise figures. For example, if a 400 Ω source impedance is used its Johnson noise will be 

2.6 nVrms/√Hz. The overall noise at the SR865 input will be [(2.6)

2 + (2.5)2

]

1/2 or 

3.6 nVrms/√Hz.

We'll talk more about noise sources later in this section.

At lower gains (Input Ranges above 10 mV), there is not enough gain to amplify the 

input noise to a level greater than the noise of the A/D converter. In these cases, the 

apparent input noise increases with the Input Range. For example, the configuration 

above will appear to have 30 nV pk–pk noise at the input when the Input Range is set to 

100 mV and 250 nV pk–pk when the Input Range is 1 V. This means that even with 1 V 

of interfering noise, the SR865 can measure fref signals below 1 μV by increasing the 

amount of low pass filtering.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 51

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Anti-aliasing Filter

Between the input amplifier and A/D converter there is an anti-aliasing filter. This filter 

is required by the signal digitization process. According to the Nyquist criterion, signals 

must be sampled at a frequency at least twice the highest signal frequency. In this case, 

the highest signal frequency is 2.5 MHz and the sampling frequency is 10 MHz so things 

are OK. However, no signals above 5 MHz can be allowed to reach the A/D converter. 

These signals would violate the Nyquist criterion and be undersampled. The result of this 

undersampling is “aliasing”: these higher frequency signals appear as lower frequencies 

in the digital data stream. Thus a signal at 9 MHz would appear as 1 MHz in the digital 

data stream and be detectable by the digital PSD. This would be a problem.

To avoid this aliasing, the analog signal is filtered to remove any signals above 2.5 MHz. 

This filter has a flat pass band from dc to 3 MHz so as not to affect measurements in the 

operating range of the lock-in. The filter rolls off rapidly from 3 MHz to 8 MHz. 

Amplitude variations and phase shifts due to this filter are calibrated out at the factory 

and do not affect measurements. This filter is transparent to the user.

Input Impedance

The input impedance of the SR865 is 10 MΩ. If a higher input impedance is desired, then 

a preamplifier such as the SR550 must be used. The SR550 has an input impedance of 

100 MΩ and is ac coupled from 1 Hz to 100 kHz.

Input Connections

In order to achieve the best accuracy for a given measurement, care must be taken to 

minimize the various noise sources that can be found in the laboratory. With intrinsic 

noise (Johnson noise, 1/f noise or input noise), the experiment or detector must be 

designed with these noise sources in mind. These noise sources are present regardless of 

the input connections. The effect of noise sources in the laboratory (such as motors, 

signal generators, etc.) and the problem of differential grounds between the detector and 

the lock-in can be minimized by careful input connections.

There are two basic methods for connecting a voltage signal to the lock-in. The singleended connection is more convenient, while the differential connection eliminates 

spurious pick-up more effectively.

Single-Ended Voltage Connection (A)

In the first method, the lock-in uses the A input in a single-ended mode. The lock-in 

detects the signal as the voltage between the center and outer conductors of the A input 

only. The lock-in does not force the shield of the A cable to ground, rather it is internally 

connected to the lock-in's ground via a resistor. The value of this resistor is selected by 

the user. Float uses 10 kΩ and Ground uses 10Ω. This avoids ground loop problems 

between the experiment and the lock-in due to differing ground potentials. The lock-in 

lets the shield ‘quasi-float’ in order to sense the experiment ground. However, noise 

pickup on the shield will appear as noise to the lock-in. This is bad since the input 

amplifier cannot reject this noise. Common mode noise, which appears on both the center 

and shield, is rejected by the common-mode rejection of the lock-in input, but noise on 

only the shield is not rejected at all.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
52 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Differential Voltage Connection (A−B)

The second method of connection is the differential mode. The lock-in measures the 

voltage difference between the center conductors of the A and B inputs. Both of the 

signal connections are shielded from spurious pick-up. Noise pickup on the shields does 

not translate into signal noise since the shields are ignored. The shields of A and B are 

connected together and can set to Float or Ground as above.

When using two cables, it is important that both cables travel the same path between the 

experiment and the lock-in. In particular, there should not be a large loop area enclosed 

by the two cables. Large loop areas are susceptible to magnetic pickup.

Common Mode Signals

Common mode signals are those signals which appear equally on both center and shield 

(A) or on the center of both A and B (A−B). With either connection scheme, it is 

important to minimize both the common mode noise and the common mode signal. 

Notice that the signal source is held near ground potential in both illustrations above. If 

the signal source floats at a nonzero potential, the signal which appears on both the A and 

B inputs will not be perfectly cancelled. The common mode rejection ratio (CMRR) 

specifies the degree of cancellation. For low frequencies, the CMRR of 100 dB indicates 

that the common mode signal is canceled to 1 part in 105

. Even with a CMRR of 100 dB, 

a 100 mV common mode signal behaves like a 1 μV differential signal! This is especially 

bad if the common mode signal is at the reference frequency (this often happens due to 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 53

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

ground loops). The CMRR decreases by about 6 dB/octave (20 dB/decade) starting at 

around 1 kHz. 

ac vs dc Coupling

The signal input can be either ac or dc coupled. The ac coupling passes signals above 160 

mHz (0.16 Hz) and attenuates signals at lower frequencies. ac coupling also degrades the 

common mode rejection of differential inputs. 

At low signal frequencies, dc coupling is required.

A dc signal, if not removed by the ac coupling filter, will multiply with the reference sine 

wave and produce a PSD output at the reference frequency (sometimes referred to as 1f). 

This signal is not normally present and needs to be removed by the low pass filter. If the 

dc component of the signal is large, then this output will be large and require a long time 

constant or synchronous filter to remove. ac coupling removes the dc component of the 

signal without any sacrifice in signal as long as the frequency is above 160 mHz.

Current Input (I)

The current input on the SR865 uses a separate input BNC. The current input has a gain 

of either 106 or 108 Volts/Amp (1 μA or 10 nA range). The input burden resistance is 

either 100 Ω (1 μA range) or 1 kΩ (10 nA range). Currents from 3 μA down to 1 fA full 

scale can be measured.

The impedance of the signal source is the most important factor to consider in deciding 

between voltage and current measurements.

For high source impedances, greater than 1 MΩ (1 μA range) or 100 MΩ (10 nA range), 

and small currents, use the current input. Its relatively low input impedance greatly 

reduces the amplitude and phase errors caused by the cable capacitance-source 

impedance time constant. The cable capacitance should still be kept small to minimize 

the high frequency noise gain of the current preamplifier.

For moderate to low source impedances, or larger currents, the voltage input is preferred. 

A small value resistor may be used to shunt the signal current and generate a voltage 

signal. The lock-in then measures the voltage across the shunt resistor. Select the resistor 

value to keep the shunt voltage small (so it does not affect the source current) while 

providing enough signal for the lock-in to measure.

Which current range should you use? The current range determines the input current 

noise of the lock-in as well as its measurement bandwidth. Signals far above the input 

bandwidth are attenuated by 6 dB/oct. The noise and bandwidth are listed below.

Range Input Noise

1 μA 130 fA/√Hz 400 kHz

Bandwidth

10 nA 13 fA/√Hz 2 kHz

The current to voltage preamplifier is always dc coupled. 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
54 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Intrinsic (Random) Noise Sources

Random noise finds its way into experiments in a variety of ways. Good experimental 

design can reduce these noise sources and improve the measurement stability and 

accuracy.

There are a variety of intrinsic noise sources which are present in all electronic signals. 

These sources are physical in origin.

Johnson Noise

Every resistor generates a noise voltage across its terminals due to thermal fluctuations in 

the electron density within the resistor itself. These fluctuations give rise to an opencircuit noise voltage,

(rms) 4 TR f Vnoise = k ∆

where k=Boltzmann's constant (1.38x10−23 J/K), T is the temperature in kelvins (typically 

300 K), R is the resistance in ohms, and ∆f is the bandwidth in hertz. ∆f is the equivalent 

noise bandwidth of the measurement.

Since the input signal amplifier in the SR865 has a bandwidth of approximately 3 MHz, 

the effective noise at the amplifier input is Vnoise = 220√R nVrms or 1.1√R μV pk–pk. 

This noise is broadband and if the source impedance of the signal is large, can determine 

the required Input Range of the lock-in.

The amount of noise measured by the lock-in is determined by the measurement 

bandwidth. Remember, the lock-in does not narrow its detection bandwidth until after the 

phase sensitive detectors. In a lock-in, the equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) of the 

low pass filter (time constant) sets the detection bandwidth. In this case, the measured 

noise of a resistor at the lock-in input, typically the source impedance of the signal, is 

simply

Vnoise (rms) = 0.13 R ENBWnV

where R is in ohms and ENBW is in hertz. The ENBW is determined by the time 

constant (T) and slope as shown below (for normal RC type filters).

Slope

6 dB/oct 1/(4T)

ENBW

12 dB/oct 1/(8T)

18 dB/oct 3/(32T)

24 dB/oct 5/(64T)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 55

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The signal amplifier bandwidth determines the amount of broadband noise that will be 

amplified. This affects the Input Range (analog signal gain). The time constant sets the 

amount of post-demodulation noise which will be measured at the reference frequency.

1/f Noise 

Every 10 Ω resistor, no matter what it is made of, has the same Johnson noise. However, 

there is excess noise in addition to Johnson noise which arises from fluctuations in 

resistance due to the current flowing through the resistor. For carbon composition 

resistors, this is typically 0.1 μV-3 μV of rms noise per Volt of applied across the 

resistor. Metal film and wire-wound resistors have about 10 times less noise. This noise 

has a 1/f spectrum and makes measurements at low frequencies more difficult.

Other sources of 1/f noise include noise found in vacuum tubes and semiconductors.

Shot Noise

Electric current has noise due to the finite nature of the charge carriers. There is always 

some non-uniformity in the electron flow which generates noise in the current. This noise 

is called shot noise. This can appear as voltage noise when current is passed through a 

resistor, or as noise in a current measurement. The shot noise or current noise is given by

(rms) 2 I f I noise = q ∆

where q is the electron charge (1.6×10−19 coulomb), I is the RMS ac current or dc current 

depending upon the circuit, and ∆f is the bandwidth.

When the current input of a lock-in is used to measure an ac signal current, the bandwidth 

is typically so small that shot noise is not important.

Total Noise

All of these noise sources are incoherent. The total random noise is the square root of the 

sum of the squares of all the incoherent noise sources.

External Noise Sources

In addition to the intrinsic noise sources discussed previously, there are a variety of 

external noise sources within the laboratory.

Most of these noise sources are asynchronous, i.e. they are not related to the reference 

and do not occur at the reference frequency or its harmonics. Examples include lighting 

fixtures, motors, cooling units, radios, computer screens, etc. These noise sources affect 

the measurement by increasing the required dynamic reserve or lengthening the time 

constant. 

Some noise sources, however, are related to the reference and, if picked up in the signal, 

will add or subtract from the actual signal and cause errors in the measurement. Typical 

sources of synchronous noise are ground loops between the experiment, detector and 

lock-in, and electronic pick up from the reference oscillator or experimental apparatus. 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
56 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Many of these noise sources can be minimized with good laboratory practice and 

experiment design. There are several ways in which noise sources are coupled into the 

signal path.

Capacitive coupling

An ac voltage from a nearby piece of apparatus can couple to a detector via a stray 

capacitance. Although Cstray may be very small, the coupled noise may still be larger than 

a weak experimental signal. This is especially troublesome if the coupled noise is 

synchronous (at the reference frequency).

We can estimate the noise current caused by a stray capacitance by:

stray CstrayVnoise

V = C =ω

dt

d i

where ω is 2π times the noise frequency, Vnoise is the noise amplitude, and Cstray is the 

stray capacitance.

For example, if the noise source is a power circuit, then f = 60 Hz and Vnoise = 120 V. 

Cstray can be estimated using a parallel plate equivalent capacitor. If the capacitance is 

roughly an area of 1 cm2 separated by 10 cm, then Cstray is 0.009 pF. The resulting noise 

current will be 400 pA (at 60 Hz). This small noise current can be thousands of times 

larger than the signal current. If the noise source is at a higher frequency, the coupled 

noise will be even greater.

If the noise source is at the reference frequency, then the problem is much worse. The 

lock-in rejects noise at other frequencies, but pick-up at the reference frequency appears 

as signal!

Cures for capacitive noise coupling include:

1) Removing or turning off the noise source.

2) Keeping the noise source far from the experiment (reducing Cstray). Do not bring 

the signal cables close to the noise source.

3) Designing the experiment to measure voltages with low impedance (noise current 

generates very little voltage).

4) Installing capacitive shielding by placing both the experiment and detector in a

grounded metal box.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 57

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Inductive coupling

An ac current in a nearby piece of apparatus can couple to the experiment via a magnetic 

field. A changing current in a nearby circuit gives rise to a changing magnetic field which 

induces an emf (dØB/dt) in the loop connecting the detector to the experiment. This is like 

a transformer with the experiment–detector loop as the secondary winding.

Cures for inductively coupled noise include:

1) Removing or turning off the interfering noise source.

2) Reduce the area of the pick-up loop by using twisted pairs or coaxial cables, or 

even twisting the 2 coaxial cables used in differential connections.

3) Using magnetic shielding to prevent the magnetic field from crossing the area of 

the experiment.

4) Measuring currents, not voltages, from high impedance detectors.

Resistive coupling or ground loops

Currents flowing through the ground connections can give rise to noise voltages. This is 

especially a problem with reference frequency ground currents.

In this illustration, the detector is measuring the signal relative to a ground far from the 

rest of the experiment. The experiment senses the detector signal plus the voltage due to 

the noise source's ground return current passing through the finite resistance of the 

ground between the experiment and the detector. The detector and the experiment are 

grounded at different places which, in this case, are at different potentials.

Cures for ground loop problems include:

1) Grounding everything to the same physical point.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
58 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

2) Using a heavy ground bus to reduce the resistance of ground connections.

3) Removing sources of large ground currents from the ground bus used for small 

signals.

4) Using differential excitation and signal sensing.

Microphonics

Not all sources of noise are electrical in origin. Mechanical noise can be translated into

electrical noise by microphonic effects. Physical changes in the experiment or cables (due 

to vibrations for example) can result in electrical noise over the entire frequency range of 

the lock-in.

For example, consider a coaxial cable connecting a detector to a lock-in. The capacitance 

of the cable is a function of its geometry. Mechanical vibrations in the cable translate into 

a capacitance that varies in time, typically at the vibration frequency. Since the cable is 

governed by Q=CV, taking the derivative, we have

i

dt

d

dt

d

dt

d

+ = = C Q V V C

Mechanical vibrations in the cable which cause a dC/dt will give rise to a current in the 

cable. This current affects the detector and the measured signal.

Some ways to minimize microphonic signals are:

1) Eliminate mechanical vibrations near the experiment.

2) Tie down cables carrying sensitive signals so they do not move.

3) Use a low noise cable that is designed to reduce microphonic effects.

Thermocouple effects

The emf created by junctions between dissimilar metals can give rise to many microvolts 

of slowly varying potentials. This source of noise is typically at very low frequency since 

the temperature of the detector and experiment generally changes slowly. This effect is 

large on the scale of many detector outputs and can be a problem for low frequency 

measurements, especially in the mHz range.

Some ways to minimize thermocouple effects are:

1) Hold the temperature of the experiment or detector constant.

2) Use a compensation junction, i.e. a second junction in reverse polarity which 

generates an emf to cancel the thermal potential of the first junction. This second 

junction should be held at the same temperature as the first junction.

Noise Measurements

Lock-in amplifiers can be used to measure noise. Noise measurements are generally used 

to characterize components and detectors.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 2 Basics 59

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The SR865 measures input signal noise AT the reference frequency. Many noise sources 

have a frequency dependence which the lock-in can measure.

How Is Noise Measured?

Remember that the lock-in detects signals close to the reference frequency. How close? 

Input signals within the detection bandwidth set by the low pass filter time constant and 

roll-off appear at the output at a frequency f = fsig − fref. Input noise near fref appears as

noise at the output with a bandwidth of dc to the detection bandwidth.

For Gaussian noise, the equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) of a low pass filter is the 

bandwidth of the perfect rectangular filter which passes the same amount of noise as the 

real filter. 

The ENBW is determined by the time constant (T) and slope as shown below (for normal 

RC type filters).

Slope

6 dB/oct 1/(4T)

ENBW

12 dB/oct 1/(8T)

18 dB/oct 3/(32T)

24 dB/oct 5/(64T)

The noise is simply the standard deviation (root of the mean of the squared deviations) of 

the measured X or Y values averaged over a period of time. This involves computing the 

average of (Xvalue − Xmean)

2 where Xvalue is the current X output and Xmean is the mean X 

output. The noise result is the square root of the average. The averaging time is roughly 

200 time constants; for example, if the time constant is 100 mS, the noise measurement 

would take about 20 seconds to settle.

Shorter averaging times yield a very poor estimate of the noise (the mean varies rapidly 

and the deviations are not averaged well). Longer averaging times, while yielding better 

results, take a long time to settle to a steady answer.

Noise and Sensitivity

The noise is calculated from the final output values of X and Y. In order to accurately 

compute the noise, the Sensitivity must be set appropriately so that the displayed values 

of X or Y have enough resolution. If the displayed values of X or Y are unchanging, then 

the computed noise will be almost zero.

If there is signal at fref, then the mean value of X or Y should be removed using an Offset. 

The resolution can then be increased using Expand.

Since the noise measurements are calculated from the scaled output values, they are also 

modified by the ratio function if enabled.

Noise Display

To display a noise measurement, choose X or Y noise (Xn or Yn) as one of the displayed 

parameters in the [Config] screen. The SR865 is calculating the noise all of the time, 

whether or not X or Y noise are being displayed. Thus, as soon as noise is displayed, the 

value shown is up to date and no settling time is required. If the time constant or output 

scaling is changed, then the noise measurement will need to settle to the new value.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
60 Basics Chapter 2

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

X and Y noise are displayed in units of V(rms). The ENBW of the time constant is NOT 

factored into the calculation. To convert to spectral noise density, divide the reading by 

√ENBW. 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Operation 61

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Chapter 3 

Operation

Introduction

Power

The power switch is on the rear panel. The SR865 is turned on by pushing the switch up.

Keys

The keys are grouped and labeled according to function. This manual will refer to a key 

with square brackets such as [Key]. A complete description of the keys follows in this 

section.

Knobs

Knobs are used to adjust the internal reference frequency, reference phase shift, sine 

output amplitude, sine dc level, offsets and Aux Output levels. The knobs also have 

secondary key-press functions labeled in italics below the knobs; these functions are 

accessed by pressing the knob inward. This manual will refer to knobs in angled brackets 

such as <Knob>.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
62 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Touchscreen Buttons

Touchscreen buttons on the display allow for direct keypad entry, text entry, calculator 

functions, graph scaling and much more. This manual will refer to touchscreen buttons 

with curly brackets such as {Button}.

Reset

To reset the unit, hold down the [Local] key while the power is turned on. The unit will 

use the standard settings. A similar reset is available without cycling power by pressing 

the [Save Recall] key and selecting {Recall default}.

Serial Number and Firmware Version

Press and hold [Local] and then [Auto Range] at the same time to display the unit serial 

number and version numbers. Press [Screen Layout] to dismiss the informational screen.

Local Lockout

If a computer interface has placed the unit in the Local Lockout state, indicated by the 

Remote LED, then the keys, knobs and touchscreen are disabled. Attempts to change the 

settings from the front panel will display a message indicating local control is locked out 

by the interface.

Reference Input

The reference input can be a sine wave (rising zero crossing detected) or a TTL pulse or 

square wave (rising or falling edge). The input impedance is either 1 MΩ or 50 Ω. The 

Sine Trig is ac coupled (>1 Hz). For low frequencies (<1 Hz), it is necessary to use a 

TTL reference signal. The TTL input provides the best overall performance and should 

be used whenever possible.

Sine Out

The internal oscillator outputs are differential with 50 Ω output impedance each. The 

output amplitude is specified as Vrms differential into 50 Ω loads (amplitude = sine+ − 

sine−). If the output is terminated in a high impedance, the amplitude will be double. If 

only a single output is used, the amplitude will be half. Thus a single output into high 

impedance will actually have the specified amplitude. The amplitude can be set from 

1 nVrms to 2 Vrms.

The dc level of the sine output can also be specified. The dc can be applied differentially 

(outputs move apart) or in common (outputs move together). The dc level can be set from 

0.1 mV to 5 V. The maximum output is about ±6 V.

These outputs are active even when an external reference is used. In this case, the sine 

wave is phase locked to the reference and its amplitude is programmable.

A 2.5 V sync logic output is provided on the rear panel via the configurable BlazeX

output. This output is useful for triggering scopes and other equipment at the reference 

frequency. The sync output is a square wave derived from the zero crossings of the sine 

output.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 63

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CH1 & CH2 Outputs

The Channel 1 and Channel 2 outputs can be configured to output a voltage from −10 V 

to +10 V proportional to X or R (CH1) and Y or θ (CH2). The sensitivity setting 

determines full scale (±10 V).

Signal Inputs

The voltage input mode may be single-ended, A, or differential, A−B. The A and B 

inputs are voltage inputs with 10 MΩ, 25 pF input impedance. Their connector shields 

are isolated from the chassis by 10 Ω (Ground) or 1 kΩ (Float). Do not apply more than 

10 V to either input. The shields should never exceed 1 V.

The current input is configured for either 1 μA or 10 nA current range. The input burden 

resistance is 100 Ω (1 μA) or 1 kΩ (10 nA) to a virtual ground.

Key Click On/Off

Press and hold the [Calc/system] key to display the system menu. Touch {Sounds} to 

toggle the key click on and off.

Display Off Operation

Press the [Blank] key to operate with the front panel display and LEDs off. The SR865 is 

still operating, the outputs are active, data collection continues and the unit responds to 

interface commands. To change a setting, press [Blank] to return to normal operation, 

change the desired parameter, then press [Blank] again.

Front Panel Test

To test the front panel, press and hold [Local] and [Auto Range] at the same time.

Turn any knob to run through all of the LEDs. Make sure all of the knobs and all of the 

LEDs work.

Touch and drag on the touchscreen to display a little trail. The bright end signifies the lift 

location. This verifies the touch functionality.

Press each key to toggle its position (green/gray) on the screen. Keys with a secondary 

press and hold function need to be held to toggle. The knobs also have a press and hold 

feature. Check to see that all keys and knobs function.

The [Screen Layout] key exits this screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
64 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Standard Settings

If the [Local] key is held down when the power is turned on, the lock-in settings will be set to the defaults 

shown below rather than the settings that were in effect when the power was last turned off. The default 

settings may also be recalled using the *RST command over the computer interface, or by pressing [Save 

Recall] and selecting {Recall default}. In this case, the communications parameters and status registers 

are not changed.

Reference

Phase 0.000°

Reference Source Internal

Internal Frequency 100.000 kHz

Harmonic # 1

Sine Amplitude 0.00 Vrms

DC Level 0.0 V

Ext Reference Trigger Sine

Ext Reference Impedance 50 Ω

Signal

Input Voltage

A−B A

Couple AC

Ground Float

Current Range 1 μA

Input Range 1 V

Time Constant 100 ms

Filter Slope 6 dB

Advanced Filter Off

Synchronous Off

Sensitivity 1 V

Outputs

CH1 Output X

CH2 Output Y

All Offsets 0.00%

All Expands 1

All Ratios None

All Aux Outputs 0.000 V

Display

Green Channel X, Graph On

Blue Channel Y, Graph On

Yellow Channel R, Graph On

Orange Channel θ, Graph On

Screen Layout Trend

Blank No

System/General

10 Mhz Timebase Auto

Sync/BlazeX Output Sync

Sounds On

System/Files

Prefix SR865

Suffix 1

Print Mode Screen

Data Format CSV

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Operation 65

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Signal Input

Input [Select]

The Input [Select] key selects between the voltage and current preamps.

The voltage inputs (A and B) have a 10 MΩ, 25 pF input impedance. Their connector 

shields are isolated from the chassis by either 10 Ω (Ground) or 10 kΩ (Float). Do not 

apply more than 10 V to either input. The shields should never exceed 1 V.

The current input uses the I connector. The input burden resistance is 100 Ω (1 μA range) 

or 1 kΩ (10 nA range) to a virtual ground. The largest allowable current before overload 

is around 3 μA (1 μA range) or 30 nA (10 nA range). No current larger than 10 mA 

should ever be applied to this input.

Voltage [A−B]

The voltage input can be either a single-ended (A) or differential (A−B) voltage. The 

shields of A and B are connected and grounded by either 10 Ω (Ground) or 10 kΩ (Float).

Voltage [Couple]

This key selects the voltage input coupling. The signal input can be either ac or dc 

coupled. The ac coupling option uses a high pass filter to pass signals above 160 mHz 

and attenuate signals at lower frequencies. ac coupling should be used at frequencies 

above 160 mHz whenever possible. At lower frequencies, dc coupling is required. ac 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
66 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

coupling results in gain and phase errors at low frequencies as wells as reduced CMRR 

performance. 

Remember, the Reference Input is ac coupled when a sine reference is used. This also 

results in phase errors at low frequencies.

Voltage [Ground]

This key chooses the shield grounding configuration. The shields of the input connectors 

(A and B) are not connected directly to the lock-in chassis ground. In Float mode, the 

shields are connected by 10 kΩ to the chassis ground. In Ground mode, the shields are 

connected by 10 Ω to ground. Typically, the shields should be grounded if the signal 

source is floating and floating if the signal source is grounded. Do not exceed 1 V on the 

shields.

Voltage [Input Range]

The voltage input range specifies the largest input signal (ac or dc coupled) before the 

voltage input is overloaded. The smaller the input range value, the higher the amplifier 

gain leading to the A/D converter. The signal strength LEDs indicate how much of the 

A/D range is being used. When the lowest yellow LED is on, try decreasing the input 

range (increasing the gain).

In general, use the smallest input range possible without overload. Remember, the largest 

signal, whether it’s at fref or just noise, will be the first to overload.

This setting has no effect when the current input is selected.

The Signal Monitor on the rear panel is the amplifier output.

Current [Range]

The current input uses the I connector. The input burden resistance is 1 kΩ (10 nA range) 

or 100 Ω (1 μA range) to a virtual ground. The shield is chassis ground. The largest 

allowable current (ac plus dc) before overload is approximately ±4 μA or ±40 nA. No 

current larger than 10 mA should ever be applied to this input.

The current range determines the input current noise as well as the input bandwidth. The 

10 nA range has 10 times lower noise but 200 times lower bandwidth. Be sure the signal 

frequency is below the input bandwidth limit. The noise and bandwidth are listed below.

Range Noise

1 μA 130 fA/√Hz 400 kHz

Bandwidth

10 nA 13 fA/√Hz 2 kHz

The impedance of the current source should be greater than 1 MΩ when using the 1 μA

range and greater than 100 MΩ when using the 10 nA range.

The signal strength LEDs indicate how much of the A/D range is being used. The Signal 

Monitor on the rear panel is the amplifier output.

The current range setting has no effect when the voltage input is selected.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 67

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Input Overload

The Overload LED in this section indicates an input overload. This occurs for voltage 

inputs greater than the voltage input range (unless removed by ac coupling) or current 

inputs exceeding ±4 μA (1 μA range) or ±40 nA (10 nA range).

An input overload compromises the measurement of X, Y, R and θ. Any display of these 

quantities will be accompanied by an Ovld indication.

Either increase the input range or reduce the input signals to remove the overload.

Slew Rate

Overloads can also be caused by high slew rate voltage signals. These are large signals 

with fast rise or fall times. This can be a square wave (at any frequency) with fast 

transitions, or simply a large amplitude high frequency sine wave. In these cases, the 

amplifier may become slew rate limited and unable to accurately amplify other 

components of the signal. When this occurs, the Overload LED may light even though 

the signal strength indicator is not at its maximum. Once again, increase the input range 

or reduce the input signal.

[Time Constant]

The time constant may be set from 1 μs to 30 ks. The time constant is indicated by 1 or 3 

times 1, 10 or 100 with the appropriate units.

This time constant sets the bandwidth of the low pass filter after the phase sensitive 

detectors for X and Y. This is the filter that removes signals at frequencies other than fref. 

In general, longer time constants provide more noise filtering and quieter measurements 

but longer response times.

The time constant also determines the equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) of the low 

pass filter. This is the measurement bandwidth for X and Y noise and depends upon the 

time constant and filter slope. (See the Noise discussion in the Basics section.)

In some experiments, output latency (delay from signal input to analog output) at short 

time constants is important. Use the rear panel BlazeX output for the lowest latency 

analog X output. Otherwise, the front panel outputs CH1 and CH2 as well as the rear 

panel X and Y outputs have sufficient bandwidth for all time constants.

Filter [Slope/adv]

This key selects the number of poles in the low pass filter. Choosing 6, 12, 18 or 24 

dB(/oct) selects 1, 2, 3 or 4 poles. Using more poles can decrease the required time 

constant and make a measurement faster.

The normal low pass filter is an RC filter. This is equivalent to the traditional filter found 

in analog lock-ins.

To use advanced filters in place of the RC filters press and hold the [Slope/adv] key until 

the Advanced LED turns on. Brief presses of [Slope/adv] cycles the number of poles 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
68 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

from 1 to 4 (6 to 24 dB). Another press and hold of the [Slope/adv] key reverts the filters 

back to RC filters and turns off the Advanced LED.

For two filters with the same noise bandwidth, i.e. whose outputs would be equally noisy 

if the input was white noise, the advanced filters have faster transient response, less

overshoot, and higher stopband attenuation to ensure greater suppression of out-of-band 

spurs.

When the time constant is 3 s or faster an advanced FIR filter pole of equivalent noise 

bandwidth (ENBW) is substituted for each RC filter pole.

For time constants of 10 s through 1000 s, the advanced filter is a Linear Phase (LP) filter 

with same attenuation slope as the RC filters of the same time constant and number of 

poles. In other words, the Linear Phase filter’s stop band is aligned with the 

corresponding RC filter.

For time constants greater than 1000 s, the advanced filter is the same as the RC filter.

In an actual experimental situation, the signal is seldom simple. If the goal is to read a 

static output value, then longer time constants will achieve that. If the output value is 

changing because of parameter sweeping or a signal turning on and off, then the 

advanced filters can be of great help. In practice it is simple to try these filters, at various 

time constants and number of poles, in comparison with RC filters. They often yield 

better results in less time.

See Appendix A for more information about the advanced filters.

Filter [Sync]

Pressing this key turns synchronous filtering on or off.

Synchronous filtering removes outputs at harmonics of the reference frequency, most 

commonly 2×fref. This is very effective at low reference frequencies since 2×fref outputs 

would require very long time constants to remove. The synchronous filter does not 

attenuate broadband noise very well. The low pass filters should be used to remove 

outputs due to noise and other non-harmonic interfering signals.

The synchronous filter computes moving averages of the X and Y outputs over a 

complete reference period, 1/fref. In this way, outputs with periods 1/(n×fref) average to 

zero and are removed. Thus frequency components in the output at n×fref are all removed. 

The synchronous filter follows the normal low pass filters (time constant) and is applied 

at the outputs.

Sensitivity

In order for the synchronous filter to perform accurately, the sensitivity must be set 

appropriately. This is because the synchronous filter acts on the output scaled values of 

X and Y. If the sensitivity is set too high, the values of X and Y (in the numeric displays) 

will lack the necessary resolution. If the sensitivity is set too low, the values will 

overload. In general, setting the sensitivity to display a reasonable amount of bar graph is 

sufficient for accurate synchronous filtering. If the synchronous filter overloads because 

of the sensitivity, the Sync warning is displayed with displays of X, Y, R or θ.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 69

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Internal, External and Chop Reference

When the reference source is internal, external or chop, the synchronous filter period is 

1/fref regardless of the harmonic detect number. The output is averaged over N periods of 

the detect frequency where N is the harmonic detect number. Synchronous filtering is 

only active when the reference frequency is 4.8 kHz or below. If the reference frequency 

is above 4.8 kHz and synchronous filtering is on, then a Sync error is displayed with 

displays of X, Y, R or θ indicating that the synchronous filter is not working as expected.

Dual Reference

When the reference source is dual, the synchronous filter period is a single period of the 

actual detect frequency fdual = | N1×fint – N2×fext |, where N1 and N2 are the internal 

harmonic and dual reference external harmonic detect numbers respectively. 

Synchronous filtering is only active when the actual detect frequency is 4.8 kHz or 

below. If the detect frequency is above 4.8 kHz and synchronous filtering is on, then a 

Sync error is displayed with displays of X, Y, R or θ indicating that the synchronous filter 

is not working as expected.

Settling Time

When the synchronous filter is active, the phase sensitive detectors (PSD's) are followed 

by the specified low pass filtering (time constant filter) and then the synchronous filter. 

This removes non-harmonic noise before the synchronous filter.

The settling time of the synchronous filter is one period of the filter (usually 1/fref). Since 

the synchronous filter follows the phase sensitive detectors, the time constant filters and 

output scaling, any change in the signal amplitude, reference frequency, phase, time 

constant, slope or sensitivity will cause the outputs to settle for one period of the filter. 

These transients are because the synchronous filter provides a steady output only if its 

input is repetitive from period to period.

The transient response also depends upon the time constants of the regular filters. Very 

short time constants (<< period) have little effect on the transient response. Longer time 

constants (< period) can magnify the amplitude of a transient. Much longer time 

constants (≥ period) will increase the settling time far beyond a period.

[Sensitivity]

The Sensitivity setting of the SR865 determines what input signal corresponds to 10 V 

full scale output for X, Y and R. For example, a Sensitivity of 100 mV means that a 

signal at fref of 100 mVrms will result in a 10 V output of R. X and Y will reach a 

maximum of 10 V depending upon the phase of the signal.

The Sensitivity also sets the scale for the displayed bar graphs and numeric readouts.

Note that this is a numerical output conversion. Output overloads do not generally affect 

the actual measurement results! They only indicate that the output value exceeds 100% of 

the chosen Sensitivity and the output BNC, the bar graph and the displayed numerical 

readout will be pinned at their maximums. The results displayed on the strip charts or 

available over the computer interfaces are the floating point outputs and are unaffected by 

output overloads. Output overloads are indicated by a ‘Scale’ indicator in the X, Y or R 

displays.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
70 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The Sensitivity should be chosen to conveniently and accurately display the measurement 

results on the output BNC, the bar graph and the numerical readout. The Sync filter also 

uses the Sensitivity as an indicator of the signal range it needs to accommodate. An 

output overload does not necessarily mean a Sync filter overload, but a ‘Sync’ error 

indicated in the X, Y, R or θ displays does signify a Sync filter overload.

θ ranges from −180° to +180° regardless of the scale or range. When CH2 outputs a 

voltage proportional to θ, the output scale is 18°/Volt or 180°=10 V. The phase bar graph 

and numeric readout scales are also unaffected by the Sensitivity.

Synchronous Filters and Noise Calculations

Synchronous filtering and calculation of Xnoise and Ynoise are performed on the output 

scaled values of X and Y. Thus, their accuracy is affected by a poor choice of Sensitivity. 

If the Sensitivity is set too large, the values of X and Y (in the numeric displays) will lack 

the necessary resolution. If the Sensitivity is set too low, the values will be overloaded 

(pinned) and no noise will be measured. In general, setting the Sensitivity to display a 

reasonable amount of bar graph is sufficient.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 71

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CH1 and CH2 Outputs: Offset, Ratio and Expand

 

Analog Outputs

Analog voltages proportional to X, Y, R and θ can be output from the SR865. The X and 

Y rear panel outputs always output X and Y. The CH1 output voltage is proportional to 

either X or R. The CH2 output voltage is proportional to either Y or θ. The output 

voltages are determined by

Expand 10V

1.000 V

Ratio In

Offset

Sensitivity

X,Y or R

Output × ×





























 





−

=

The output is normally 10 V for an input signal equal to the sensitivity. The offset 

subtracts a percentage of full scale (up to ±999%) from the output. Expand multiplies the 

difference by a factor of 1, 10 or 100. This result may be divided by a ratio input (Aux 

Input voltage). An Aux Input voltage of 1.000 V corresponds to unity.

Outputs which would exceed ±10 V generate an Output Overload and the red output

Overload LED will light. Any corresponding displayed numeric value/bar graph will 

indicate ‘Scale’ in the display. The actual measurement is unaffected since it is done in 

floating point and has no overload. Data displayed in the strip chart will still be accurate.

The X and Y offset, expand and ratio functions in the SR865 are output functions, they 

do not affect the calculation of R or θ. R has its own output offset, expand and ratio.

Phase ranges from −180° to +180° regardless of the sensitivity. When CH2 outputs a 

voltage proportional to θ, the output scale is 18°/Volt or 180° = 10 V. The phase bar 

graph and numeric readout scales are also unaffected by the Sensitivity. Phase has no 

offset, ratio or expand capability. To offset phase, simply use Auto Phase. To expand 

phase, expand the value of Y in quadrature.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
72 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Offset

Output offsets are reflected in the displays. For example, when the X output is offset to 

zero, the displayed value will drop to zero also. This means that the bar graph and 

numeric readout both drop to zero. In addition if X is being charted on the graph, its 

graph will drop to zero. Any display which is showing a quantity which is affected by a 

non-zero offset will display a highlighted Offset indicator within its display.

Ratio

The X, Y, and R may be normalized to an Aux Input voltage. This is called a ratio 

measurement. An output ratio is reflected in the displays. The numeric values, bar graphs 

and strip charts all reflect the normalized output. Any display which is showing a 

quantity which is affected by a ratio will display a highlighted Ratio indicator within its 

display.

Expand

Output expands do not increase the displayed numeric values of X, Y or R. Expand 

increases the resolution of the displayed X, Y or R numeric value. This is because the 

expand function increases the resolution of the output, not the size of the input signal. 

The displayed value will show an increased resolution but will continue to display the 

original value minus the offset. Any display which is showing a quantity which is 

affected by a non-unity expand will display a highlighted Expand indicator within its 

display.

Output expands affect the bar graphs. The bar graphs are simply a reflection of the BNC 

outputs and as such are expanded to provide more visual resolution.

Output expands do not affect the strip charts. The values being charted are already 

floating point numbers with all of the resolution available. The strip charts do reflect the 

offsets however.

See the SR865 Basics section for more information.

Output [Select]

This key selects the source for the CH1 (CH2) output BNC. CH1 can select either X or R. 

CH2 can select either Y or θ. This also determines which parameter’s offset and expand 

are adjusted with the [Expand] key and the <Offset> knob.

Output [Expand]

Pressing this key selects the X or R Expand (CH1) or the Y Expand (CH2). Use the 

[Select] key to select either X or R (CH1) and Y or θ (CH2). θ cannot be expanded. To 

expand phase, expand the value of Y in quadrature.

The expand can be none (×1 or no expand), ×10 or ×100. If the expand is ×10 or ×100, 

the corresponding LED will light. The output can never exceed full scale (±10 V) when 

expanded. An output expanded beyond full scale will be output overloaded.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 73

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Output <Offset>

Press this knob briefly to toggle the X or R offset (CH1) or the Y offset (CH2) on and off. 

Use the [Select] key to select either X or R (CH1) and Y or θ (CH2). The value of θ 

cannot be offset. Use Auto Phase to offset phase to zero.

This allows the offset to be turned on and off without adjusting the actual offset 

percentage.

The OFFSET LED is on when the offset is being applied.

Press and hold the <Offset> knob to display an offset keypad as shown below.

Touch {Auto} Offset to automatically adjust the X offset (or Y or R) such that X (or Y or 

R) becomes zero. Offsets can also be set using the keypad or by turning the <Offset> 

knob. Turning the knob ALWAYS adjusts the offset, even if the offset is toggled off and 

the keypad is not shown.

Offsets are set as a percentage of the Sensitivity up to ±999% (10×). The offset 

percentage is not changed with the sensitivity — it is an output function.

Touch {Close} to dismiss the keypad.

Touch {Ratio} to cycle between Off (no ratio) and an Aux Input. The RATIO LED is on 

when a ratio is being applied.

Output Overload

Outputs which would exceed ±10 V generate an Output Overload and the red Overload

LED will light. Any corresponding displayed numeric value/bar graph will indicate 

‘Scale’ in the display. The actual measurement is unaffected since it is done in floating 

point and has no overload. Data displayed in the strip chart will still be accurate.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
74 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Reference

Each of the data screens always displays a reference info bar across the top.

This bar always shows tiles displaying the reference phase, frequency, detected harmonic, 

sine out amplitude and dc level. Each of these parameters can be adjusted using the knobs 

and buttons in this section of the front panel.

Touching one of these tiles brings up a numeric keypad for direct entry.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 75

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Numeric entry is straightforward. {Close} will return to the data screen. The buttons 

{F1}, {F2}, {F3} and {F4} are frequency presets. Touching a preset will load the preset 

value immediately. Touch and hold a preset button to memorize the current setting. Other 

parameters may have slightly different entry screens.

Source [Ref/chop]

Press this key briefly to cycle through the reference sources. Press and hold to display the 

SR540 Chopper setup screen (see Chop, below).

Internal

When the source is Internal, the SR865's synthesized internal oscillator is used as the 

reference. The Ref In BNC is ignored in this case. The internal frequency is shown in the 

info bar. Use the <Frequency> knob or the numeric keypad to adjust the frequency.

In this mode, the Sine Out is at the internal frequency.

External

When the source is External, the SR865 will phase lock to the external reference 

provided at the Ref In BNC. The SR865 will lock to frequencies between 0.001 Hz and 

2.5 MHz. The external frequency is shown in the info bar. The <Frequency> knob has no 

effect on the external frequency.

In this mode, the Sine Out is at the external frequency.

Dual

When the source is Dual, the SR865 will detect signals at fdetect = |fint − fext| where fext is 

the external reference frequency and fint is the internal frequency. The internal frequency 

is shown in the info bar. Use the <Frequency> knob or the numeric keypad to adjust the 

internal frequency.

In this mode, the Sine Out is at the internal frequency.

To record and view the external frequency, use the [Config] key to assign fext to one of 

the four data channels.

You can find more about dual reference mode in Appendix E (page 175).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
76 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Chop

When the source is Chop, the SR865 will phase lock an external SR540 Optical Chopper 

to the SR865’s internal reference frequency. This is achieved by connecting the f

Reference output from the SR540 to the Ref In of the SR865. But instead of using this 

input as the external reference, the SR865 will servo the SR540 to lock the SR540 to the 

SR865 internal frequency. This control is via a connection from the SR865 rear panel

Aux Out 4 BNC to the CONTROL VOLTAGE input of the SR540.

This essentially transforms the SR540 into a frequency and phase stabilized chopper with 

the frequency accuracy and drift of the SR865. This is especially useful in experiments 

with multiple SR540 choppers. Each SR540 chopper (with its own SR865) can be 

synchronized to a common 10 MHz clock to achieve stable frequency and phase 

relationships with each other.

Lock-in detection is at the (measured) external frequency. The SR540 is driven to phase 

lock with this internal frequency, but is subject to the mechanical limitations of its motor 

and slew rate. The internal frequency is shown in the info bar. Use the <Frequency> knob 

or the numeric keypad to adjust the internal frequency. To record and view the external 

frequency, use the [Config] key to assign fext to one of the four data channels. By 

comparing fext and fint, the effective settling time of the SR540 to commanded frequency 

changes can be observed.

In this mode, the Sine Out is at the external frequency.

Both the SR540 and the SR865 must be configured correctly in this mode. Press and hold 

the [Ref/chop] key to display the Chopper configuration screen.

Touch the Chopper Blade Slot Count setting to specify whether the 6/5 or 30/25 slot 

blade is mounted on the SR540 chopper head. Follow the directions to set the MAX 

FREQ and REFERENCE MODE switches on the SR540.

Connect the SR540 f / fDIFF output (right hand BNC) to the SR865 Ref In BNC.

Connect the SR865 Aux Out 4 (rear panel BNC) to the SR540 CONTROL VOLTAGE 

input BNC.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 77

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Make sure that the SR865 External Trig is set to Pos TTL and the Input is 1 MΩ. Adjust 

the SR865 internal frequency to a value that the SR540 can reach with the selected blade.

The Phase setting in this screen is the ‘blade’ phase. This is the phase of the blade 

opening relative to the optical detector at the base of the chopper head. When a single 

chopper is being used, this is not important since the demodulator reference phase of the 

SR865 can be adjusted to maximize the signal. When using multiple choppers, this 

‘blade’ phase can be used to align multiple chopped beams to arrive in phase together at 

the experiment. This would otherwise be done by moving the position of the chopper or 

beam.

The <Cursor> knob will also adjust the phase value in this screen.

External [Input]

This key sets the termination of the Ref Input BNC to either 50 Ω or 1 MΩ. Be careful 

that the termination does excessively attenuate the signal or cause ringing on its edges.

External [Trig]

This key selects the external reference input trigger mode.

TTL

When either Pos TTL or Neg TTL is selected, the SR865 locks to the selected edge of a 

TTL square wave or pulse train. For reliable operation, the TTL signal should exceed 

+1.5 V when high and be less than +0.5 V when low. This trigger mode is dc coupled. 

This input mode should be used whenever possible since it is less noise prone than the 

sine wave discriminator. 

For very low frequencies (<1 Hz), a TTL reference MUST be used.

Sine

Sine input trigger locks the SR865 to the rising zero crossings of an analog signal at the 

Ref In BNC. This signal should be a clean sine wave at least 200 mVpp in amplitude. In 

this input mode, the Ref In is ac coupled (above 1 Hz). 

Sine reference mode cannot be used at frequencies far below 1 Hz. At very low 

frequencies, the TTL input modes must be used.

Unlock

In External or Dual reference source, the Unlock indicator turns on if the SR865 cannot

lock to the external reference. This can be because the external reference amplitude is too 

low or the frequency is out of range.

In Chop reference, Unlock indicates that the SR540 chopper is unlocked. This can be 

because the switches on the SR540 are incorrectly configured or the blade is not turning 

freely.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
78 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Timebase

The SR865 has a 10 MHz TIMEBASE input and output on the rear panel. Apply a 

10 MHz sine signal (1 Vrms) to the TIMEBASE input to lock the SR865’s timebase to an 

external 10 MHz timebase. The internal reference frequency of the SR865 is derived 

from this timebase. When multiple SR865’s are locked to the same 10 MHz timebase, 

then harmonically related internal frequencies on different units will stay in phase 

indefinitely.

The Ext 10 MHz LED is on when the unit is locked to an external timebase.

The SR865 can also output its own 10 MHz timebase to another unit.

Note that external function generators, even DDS locked to the same 10 MHz timebase, 

will not stay in perfect phase with the SR865. This is because the resolution of the 

frequency tuning word in the external synthesizer differs from the SR865.

<Phase>

This knob may be used to adjust the phase. The phase shift ranges from −180° to +180° 

with 0.001° resolution. Press and hold this knob to set the phase to zero.

The phase value is shown in the info bar at the top of the screen. Touch this {Phase} tile 

to show the numeric entry screen.

When using an external reference, the reference phase shift is the phase between the 

external reference and the digital sine wave which is multiplying the signal in the PSD. 

This is also the phase between the sine output and the digital sine wave used by the PSD 

in either internal or external reference mode. Changing this phase shift only shifts internal 

sine waves. The effect of this phase shift can only be seen at the lock-in outputs X, Y and 

θ. R is phase independent.

Auto Phase

Touching {Auto} in the numeric entry screen or pressing the [Auto Phase] key will adjust 

the reference phase shift so that the measured signal phase is 0°. This is done by 

subtracting the present measured value of θ from the reference phase shift. It will take 

several time constants for the outputs to reach their new values. Auto Phase may not 

result in a zero phase if the measurement is noisy or changing.

Phase [+90°] and [−90°]

The [+90°] and [−90°] keys add or subtract 90.000° from the reference phase shift.

Touching {+90°} and {−90°} in the phase numeric entry screen will do the same.

<Frequency>

If the reference source is Internal, Dual or Chop, this knob adjusts the internal reference 

frequency. 

The internal frequency is shown in the info bar at the top of the screen. Touch the {Fint} 

tile to show the numeric entry screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 79

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The internal frequency has 6 digits or 0.1 mHz resolution, whichever is larger. The 

frequency can range from 1.0 mHz to 2.50 MHz. The upper limit is decreased if the 

harmonic number is greater than 1. In this case, the upper limit is 2.5 MHz/N where N is 

the harmonic number.

Press and hold this knob to set the harmonic detect to 1 (fundamental).

Frequency [Harm Up] and [Harm Down]

Pressing these keys increments and decrements the harmonic detect number from 1 to 99. 

The harmonic number is shown in the info bar at the top of the screen. Touch this 

{Harm} tile to show the numeric entry screen.

The SR865 can detect signals at harmonics of the reference frequency. The SR865 

multiplies the input signal with digital sine waves at N×fref. Only signals at this harmonic 

will be detected. Signals at the original reference frequency are not detected and are 

attenuated as if they were noise. Always check the harmonic detect number before 

making any measurements.

The Sine Out is not affected by the harmonic detection. Its frequency is always the 

fundamental reference frequency.

Internal and Chop Reference

When the reference mode is Internal or Chop, these keys change the internal harmonic 

number Nint and detection is at Nint×fint and the internal reference frequency is limited to 

2.5 MHz/Nint.

External Reference

When the reference mode is External, these keys change the external harmonic number 

Next and detection is at Next×fext. The SR865 will always track the external reference.

Dual Reference

When the reference mode is Dual, detection is at fdual = | Nint×fint − Next×fext |. Use the 

harmonic numeric entry screen to adjust either harmonic number. The limits described 

above apply. The Sine Out will still be at fint.

<Amplitude>

This knob adjusts the sine out amplitude.

The amplitude is shown in the info bar at the top of the screen. Touch the {Ampl} tile to 

show the numeric entry screen.

The amplitude has 3 digits or 1 nV resolution, whichever is larger. The amplitude can 

range from 1 nVrms to 2.00 Vrms.

Press and hold this knob to set the amplitude to zero.

The Sine Out amplitude is specified for differential output (Sine+) − (Sine−). Each output 

BNC has the specified rms amplitude through a 50Ω output impedance. If an output is 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
80 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

terminated in a high impedance, the amplitude will be the specified value. If an output is 

terminated in 50Ω, the amplitude will be half the specified value. The outputs are 180° 

out of phase. If both outputs are used differentially, the amplitude will be twice the output 

of a single BNC.

In general, if single output is used as the A input, the measured signal will be the 

specified amplitude (a single output terminated in a high impedance).

Using differential signals can be helpful when the sine amplitude is very small.

When the reference source is Internal or Dual, this is the excitation source provided by 

the SR865. When an external reference is used (or in Chop mode), this sine output 

provides a sine wave phase locked to the external reference.

The rear panel BlazeX BNC output can be configured in the System menu (hold 

[Calc/system]) to provide a square wave sync at the reference frequency. This square 

wave is generated by discriminating the zero crossings of the sine output. This signal can 

provide a trigger or sync signal to the experiment when the internal reference source is 

used. This signal is also available when the reference is externally provided. In this case, 

the sync output is phase locked to the external reference.

<DC Level>

This knob adjusts the sine out dc level.

The dc level is shown in the info bar at the top of the screen. Touch the {DC} tile to show 

the numeric entry screen.

The dc level has 3 digits or 0.1 mV resolution, whichever is larger. The dc level ranges 

from −5.00 V to +5.00 V.

Press and hold this knob to set the dc level to zero.

The dc level adds an offset to the sine output. Each output BNC has the specified dc level 

through a 50Ω output impedance. If an output is terminated in a high impedance, the dc 

level will be the specified value. If an output is terminated in 50Ω, the dc level will be 

half the specified value.

The dc level is added to the outputs in Difference mode (opposite sign dc level on each 

BNC) or in Common mode (same sign dc level on both BNC’s). Choose the mode with 

the [Mode] key.

DC Level [Mode]

This key selects the dc level mode. The dc level is added to the sine outputs in Difference 

mode (opposite sign dc level on each BNC) or in Common mode (same sign dc level on 

both BNC’s).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 81

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Display

[Screen Layout]

Press [Screen Layout] to cycle through the different screen layouts.

Trend Graph Full Screen Strip Chart

Half Screen Strip Chart Full Screen FFT

Half Screen FFT Big Numbers

[Screen Shot]

Pressing [Screen Shot] saves a screen shot to the USB memory stick as a .BMP file. Set 

the Print Mode in the system menu. Screen is an exact screen shot, Print replaces the 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
82 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

black background with white and Monochrome is black and white. Screen shots also 

contain the time/date and summary of input parameters.

The Busy LED indicates that the USB stick is busy and should not be removed.

[Blank]

Press the [Blank] key to operate with the front panel display and LEDs off. The SR865 is 

still operating, the outputs are active, data collection continues and the unit responds to 

interface commands. To change a setting, press [Blank] to return to normal operation, 

change the desired parameter, then press [Blank] again.

The Blank LED is lit while the rest of the display is off.

[Config]

The SR865 displays up to 4 channels at a time, in green, blue, yellow and orange. Each 

channel is assigned a parameter using the [Config] key. Parameters are chosen from X, 

Y, R, θ (detected), Fint, Fext, Reference Phase, Sine Amplitude, DC Level, any Aux Input 

or Output, Xnoise, or Ynoise .

Highlight one of the channel’s Display tile, then select a parameter from below to assign 

it to the channel.

Displayed parameters can be re-assigned at any time. Data is being stored for all 

parameters all of the time. 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 83

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Cursor

<Cursor>

The screen cursor readout is only available for strip chart and FFT displays. Trend and 

Big Number screens do not have a cursor function.

Strip Chart Cursor

The strip chart cursor is only active when the strip chart is paused and the graph is 

stationary. Use {Pause} in the horizontal scale palette to stop the chart scrolling and 

pause the graph. Use the <Cursor> knob to position the display cursor and readout the 

data values. These readouts correspond to the min, max or mean of the data in the time 

bin at the cursor location. The time of the cursor location is displayed in the tile at the left 

edge of the scale bar below the graph. Touch this tile to switch between elapsed time 

from the right edge to absolute time (time and date when the point was taken). Use 

{Cursor MinMaxMean} and {Cursor Width}, on the horizontal scale palate, to change 

the cursor. Note that the cursor marker may not lie on the data graph for wide cursors 

since the marker shows the min, max or mean of all the data within the cursor width.

Relative Chart Cursor

To read chart data relative to a reference point within the chart, position the cursor at the 

desired reference location and press the <Cursor> knob once. A stationary vertical line is 

placed at the reference location and the cursor readout values will be relative to the data 

at this location, and the Rel LED is lit. Touch the cursor location tile (below the cursor 

readouts) to switch between absolute time and time relative to the cursor.

Note that changing the horizontal scale may move the reference location off screen (to 

the left). The reference location is preserved in this case, the reference line is just not 

visible on the graph.

To clear the reference location, press the <Cursor> knob again. The cursor readout now 

toggles between absolute time and elapsed time from the right hand edge, and the Rel

LED turns off.

FFT Cursor

The cursor is always active in the FFT screens. The amplitude and frequency readout is at 

the upper right of the graph. Use the <Cursor> knob to position the cursor. There is no 

relative cursor function

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
84 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Touch in the vertical scale paleete to change the width of the cursor. In the FFT 

display, the wide cursors always find the peak within the cursor region. This makes 

reading an FFT much easier.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 85

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Functions

[Auto Phase]

[Auto Phase] adjusts the reference phase shift so that the measured signal phase is 0°. 

This is done by subtracting the measured value of θ from the reference phase shift. It will 

take several time constants for the outputs to reach their new values during which time θ 

will move towards 0°. Do not press [Auto Phase] again until the outputs have stabilized. 

When the measurement is noisy or if the outputs are changing, Auto Phase may not result 

in a zero phase.

[Auto Range]

[Auto Range] will adjust the Input Range so that the input signal does not overload the 

input amplifier and that there is sufficient gain to drive the A/D converter. Remember 

that the signal input is both the signal at fref plus noise which may be much larger. The 

largest component of the signal will determine the resulting input range.

When the input is at very low frequency, [Auto Range] may not function well. In this 

case it is better to watch the signal strength indicators and change the input range 

manually.

[Auto Scale]

[Auto Scale] will adjust the Sensitivity so that the displays and outputs of X, Y and R are 

optimized. This results in numeric and bar graph displays with the best resolution 

possible.

Note that the Sensitivity will affect analog outputs proportional to X, Y and R. Do 

not use [Auto Scale] if changes to the analog output scales cannot be tolerated in the 

experiment.

[Save Recall]

Press [Save Recall] to display the Save/Recall screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
86 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The SR865 can store 8 complete setups. In addition the default setup can be recalled.

Touch one of the 8 {Save} buttons to save a setup. Enter a name for this setup using the 

keypad. Touch {Confirm} to commit the current setup or {Cancel} to quit the operation.

Locations which already contain a saved setup will show the setup name and the time and 

date it was saved.

Touch {Recall} for a location with a previously saved setup and a summary of settings 

which will change upon recall is shown.

Touch {Cancel} to skip recalling this setup or touch {Confirm} to recall the setup and 

dismiss this screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 87

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Interface and Data

 

Error

The Error indicator flashes whenever there is a computer interface error such as an illegal 

command or out of range parameter is received.

Activity

The Activity indicator flashes when there is command activity on a computer interface.

Trigger

The Trigger indicator flashes for triggered data acquisition.

Remote

The Remote indicator is on when the front panel is locked out by a computer interface. 

No front panel adjustments may be made.

[Local]

When a host computer places the unit in the REMOTE state, the keys, knobs and 

touchscreen are locked out. The Remote indicator is on above the [Local] key. To return 

to front panel operation, press the [Local] key.

Press and hold [Local] while turning the power on to reset the unit to its default settings. 

This does not affect the computer interface settings.

[Save]

The SR865 can save data files to a USB memory stick inserted into the front panel USB 

slot.

Press [Save] to save the data points in the current strip chart to the memory stick. This 

file can be .CSV or .MAT file as selected in the system menu.

The Busy LED indicates that the USB stick is busy and should not be removed.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
88 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Setup

[Scan/setup] and [Play/Pause]

Press and hold [Scan/setup] to display the scan setup screen.

The Scan Parameter can be Finternal, Sine Amplitude, Sine DC Level, Aux Out 1 or Aux 

Out 2. 

The Scan Type can be Linear or Logarithmic.

The Begin and End Values are the start and stop values for the scanned parameter.

The Scan Time is the total time to move from the Begin Value to the End Value. The 

Scan Parameter Update is the time spent at each scan step along the way. The shorter the 

time, the more steps in the scan and the smoother the parameter varies. The longer the 

time, the fewer steps. With experiments that take time to settle after a parameter change, 

it is often beneficial to set the update time long enough to accommodate the settling.

The scan End Mode can be Repeat, repeat Up/Down or Once (pause at the end). When 

the End Mode is set to repeat, the scan repeats over and over. Often when scanning, it is 

convenient to pause the strip chart at the end of the scan to review the results. Set the End 

Mode to Once, and the scan stops at the end value and the strip chart is automatically 

paused.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 89

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

To Run a Scan

Press [Scan/setup] briefly (don’t hold it) to turn on the scan to ready. This key turns 

scanning on and off.

The Ready LED turns on indicating that the scan is ready (at the begin value). At this 

time, the scanning parameter (if it is being displayed on screen) is shown in orange 

indicating that it is under scan control.

Press [Play Pause/reset] briefly to start the scan.

The Run LED turns on indicating that the scan is running. The scanning parameter starts 

from its begin value to its end value. Press [Play Pause/reset] briefly to pause and resume 

the scan. The Pause LED turns on indicating a scan is paused.

When the End Mode is set to Repeat or Up/Down, the scan repeats over and over.

When the End Mode is Once, the scan stops at the end value, the strip chart is paused and 

the Done LED turns on. Note that data collection continues while the chart is paused. 

Restarting the chart realigns the time history so the current time is the right edge again.

Press and hold [Play Pause/reset] to reset the scan back to the Begin Value. This leaves 

the Ready LED on and turns the Done LED off.

Press [Play Pause/reset] briefly to start the scan again.

To Stop Scanning

Press [Scan/setup] briefly (don’t hold it) to turn off the scan. This key turns scanning on 

and off. The [Play Pause/reset] has no effect unless scanning is on and the Ready LED is 

lit.

Turning the scan off reverts the scanned parameter back to its original value (from before 

scanning) and its display back to white (under front panel control).

Changes to Scan Parameters

Once the scan is turned on to ready by briefly pressing [Scan/setup], the scan 

configuration is loaded into the scanning system for use. Edits to scan parameters, such as 

Scan Time, End Mode, etc., can be entered from the scan setup screen but will not affect 

the current scan. To put any changes into action, [Scan/setup] must be briefly pressed to 

turn off the Ready LED, and then briefly pressed again to re-enable scans and turn the 

Ready LED back on. Alternatively, press and hold [Play Pause/reset] to return to the 

Ready LED on state; this will also put newly changed scan parameters into effect.

[Aux Output]

Press [Aux Output] to display the Aux Output screen.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
90 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The SR865 has 4 Aux Outputs on the rear panel. Use this screen to set their levels.

Touch one of the {Out n} buttons to select an aux output, then use the keypad to enter a 

value. The <Cursor> knob will also adjust the output value in this screen.

[Calc/system]

Press [Calc/system] briefly to display the calculator screen.

This is an RPN calculator where the operator follows all of its operands. For more 

information, ask your friends or check the internet.

The {2nd} button switches the functions of the operator keys.

Note that the reference phase, frequency and amplitude can be copied in and out of the 

calculator.

System Menu

Press and hold [Calc/system] to display the system menu. The system menu is used to set 

non-measurement parameters such computer interface configurations, file names, clock 

setup and more. Use the {↑} and {↓} buttons next to the category list to move up and 

down through the category list (General – Files – Ethernet ...). Touch a {category} to 

show its settings.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 91

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

To change a setting, touch the setting (shown within a dark gray tile) to either toggle the 

selection or highlight it for keypad entry. The Enter { } button advances to the next 

entry tile in a section. For more information about using the computer interfaces see the 

Remote Programming chapter.

General Settings

Time and Date

Touch the {h} button in the Time section to highlight the hours setting. Use the keypad or 

{↑} and {↓} buttons to set the hour of day in 24 hour format. The time will highlight in 

orange indicating that the display is not the current time but rather the time that will be 

set. Continue to enter the minutes and seconds then touch {set} to commit the time to the 

internal clock. Repeat this process for the date.

The time and date are used to label data files and screen shots as well as saved settings.

10MHz Timebase

The SR865 can accept an external 10 MHz timebase input on the rear panel. This allows 

the internal reference frequency of the SR865 to remain frequency and phase stable with 

other SR865 units on the same timebase.

When set to Internal the external timebase input is ignored. When set to Auto, the SR865 

will automatically lock to an external timebase whenever a 1 Vrms 10 MHz signal is 

detected at the timebase input. If the external timebase signal drifts out of range (either in 

amplitude or frequency) this setting will revert to Internal.

The Ext 10 MHz LED is on when the unit is locked to an external timebase.

The SR865 can also output its own 10 MHz timebase to another unit.

Sounds

Sounds can be toggled from On to Mute. These are primarily the key and knob clicks but 

also includes various other notification sounds.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
92 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Sync/BlazeX

The rear panel BlazeX output BNC can be configured to output a reference frequency 

sync signal (either bipolar or unipolar square sync) or a low-latency X output (for closed 

loop applications at short time constants).

File Settings

Data and screenshots can be saved to a USB memory stick inserted into the front panel. 

Press the [Save] button to save all the data values currently plotted on the strip chart. 

Press the [Screen Shot] button to save an image of the screen. The memory stick must be 

formatted as FAT32, and the saved files can be read by Windows and Macintosh 

computers.

Folder

Navigate to the destination folder on the memory stick. New files will be saved in the 

destination folder.

The subdirectories in the current destination folder are listed. Use the { ↑} and {↓} buttons 

in this section to scroll the list of subdirectories. Touch a {subdirectory} to select it as the 

destination. Touch {..} to go up one directory level. Repeat until the desired directory is 

selected.

Prefix and Suffix

File names are generated from the Prefix string and the Suffix number. The Next File 

Name is shown. The suffix number is automatically incremented after every file save. 

The extension is .BMP for screenshots and either .CSV or .MAT for data files.

File names must conform to the 8.3 format so the length of Prefix plus the length of the 

Suffix is limited to an 8 character string.

Enter an alphanumeric prefix string and a numeric suffix. 

Print Mode

Pressing [Screen Shot] saves a screen shot to the memory stick as a .BMP file. Set the 

Print Mode to Screen, Print or Monochrome. Screen is an exact screen shot, Print 

replaces the black background with white and Monochrome is black and white.

Format

Determines the format of the data files that are produced when the [Save] button is 

pressed. Has no effect on screenshots. Format can be set to .CSV (comma-delimited 

ASCII text file) or .MAT (Matlab binary file).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 93

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Ethernet Settings

Choose either Static or DHCP for the TCP/IP address mode. Highlight an address value 

to change it using the numeric keypad.

GPIB and RS-232 Settings

Highlight the GPIB Address to change it using the numeric keypad.

Use the RS-232 Baud Rate {↑} and {↓} buttons to select a baud rate. Select a terminator 

and parity.

VXI-11 and Web Settings

The SR865 allows computers to connect via VXI-11 from a range of Trusted IP addresses 

or Disabled altogether.

Set the Trusted IP address using ‘*’ as a wildcard. This allows any computer on a 

specified subnet VXI-11 access.

The SR865 has a webserver which allows computer access thru a webpage (at the 

SR865’s IP address). This access can be Enabled or Disabled. The webserver allows 

instrument settings to be changed and the outputs to be monitored.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
94 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Telnet Settings

The SR865 supports telnet connections. This can be Enabled or Disabled.

Choose Echo On/Off and the Receive/Transmit Terminators depending upon your host 

software requirements.

Streaming Settings

The SR865 can stream output values continuously over the ethernet interface to a host 

computer. It is the host computer’s responsibility to keep up, there is no retry on dropped 

packets.

Select the output {Channels} (X), (X and Y), (R and θ) or (X, Y, R and θ) and the desired 

{Format} 32 bit Float or 16 bit Integer. Integers are scaled to the sensitivity.

The number of bits per sample point can range from 16 (X, integer) to 128 (XYRθ, float). 

This has an impact on the network bandwidth necessary to maintain the stream.

The Maximum Sample Rate can be set to Native (depends on time constant) or set to a 

fixed rate (1.25 MHz down to 1.2 Hz). The total bandwidth required is the sample rate 

times the number of bits per point.

Choose the Packet Size to work with your host software.

The host Status is displayed.

Update Firmware

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 95

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The SR865’s firmware can be updated via the USB memory stick. Follow the directions 

that accompany the update to prepare the memory stick. Insert the memory stick into the 

front panel and press {Update} to start the process.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
96 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Rear Panel

Power Entry Module

The power entry module is used to fuse the ac line voltage input, select the line voltage, 

and block high frequency noise from entering or exiting the instrument. Refer to the first 

page of this manual for instructions on selecting the correct line voltage and fuse.

GPIB Port

The 24 pin GPIB (IEEE-488) port allows a computer to control the SR865 via the IEEE488 instrument bus. The address of the instrument is set in the system menu (hold the 

[Calc/system] key).

RS-232 Port

The RS-232 interface port is configured as a DCE. The baud rate and parity are set in the 

system menu (hold the [Calc/system] key). The number of data bits is always 8.

USB Port

The USB port allows a computer to control the SR865 via USB. The SR865 is a Test and 

Measurement Class instrument.

Ethernet Port

The Ethernet port allows a computer to control the SR865 via an ethernet network 

connection. In addition, the SR865 can serve web pages to the network and stream data 

over the network. The network addresses and permissions are configured in the system 

menu (hold the [Calc/system] key).

The green LED indicates that the unit is connected. The yellow LED is on for a gigabit 

connection and off for a 10/100 connection.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 97

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Timebase In/Out

Apply a 10 MHz sine signal (1 Vrms) to the TIMEBASE input to lock the SR865’s 

timebase to an external timebase. The internal reference frequency of the SR865 is 

derived from this timebase. When multiple SR865’s are locked to the same 10 MHz 

timebase, then harmonically related internal frequencies on different units will stay in 

phase indefinitely.

The Ext 10 MHz LED is on when the unit is locked to an external timebase.

The SR865 also outputs its own 10 MHz timebase (to another unit).

Note that external function generators, even a direct digital synthesizer locked to the 

same 10 MHz timebase, will not stay in phase with the SR865. This is because the 

resolution of the frequency tuning word in the external direct digital synthesizer differs 

from the SR865.

HDMI Output

Use the HDMI output to display the SR865 screen on a large computer monitor or 

television. The output has a resolution of 640×480 and a frame rate of 60 Hz.

Aux In 1–4 

These are auxiliary analog inputs which can be digitized by the SR865. The range is 

±10.5 V, the resolution is 1 mV and the inputs are 1 MΩ. These inputs can be displayed 

on the screen, read over the computer interfaces and graphed on the strip charts.

Aux Out 1–4 

These are auxiliary analog outputs. The range is ±10.5 V and the resolution is 1 mV. 

These outputs may be programmed from the front panel (via [Aux Output]), scanned (via 

[Scan/setup]) or controlled via the computer interfaces. Aux Out 4 is used to control an 

SR540 chopper when the reference mode is Chop.

X and Y Outputs 

The X and Y lock-in outputs are always available at these connectors. The output sample 

rate is 1.25 MHz. An input signal equal to the sensitivity will generate ±10 V at these 

outputs. 

These outputs are identical to the front panel CH1 and CH2 outputs when set to X and Y. 

These outputs are affected by the sensitivity and the X and Y offsets and expands. 

Signal Monitor Output 

This BNC provides a buffered output from the signal amplifier. This is the signal just 

before the anti-aliasing filter, A/D converter and PSD. The amplifier gain is determined 

by the Input Range (voltage input) or the Current Range (current input). The output is 

about 1 V for a maximum input.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
98 Operation Chapter 3

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

This output is useful for determining the cause of input overloads, not necessarily for 

viewing the signal of interest. If the fref signal is small relative to the input range, it may 

not be amplified enough to be viewed at the monitor output.

Trig Input 

This TTL input is used to start data capture to the internal buffer. This buffer is only 

accessible via the computer interface. The remote interface sets the capture start mode to 

triggered. The Trig Input then starts data capture into the data buffer. The internal buffer 

is 32 MB and can be configured to record (X), (X and Y), (R and θ), or (X, Y, R and θ) at 

various sample rates up to 1.25 MHz.

See the Remote Programming section for more information.

Sync/BlazeX Output

This output can be either the reference Sync output or the BlazeX output as configured in 

the system menu (hold the [Calc/system] key).

Sync

The Sync output is a ±2V or a 0-2V square wave whose edges are linked to the sine

output zero crossings. This is useful when the sine output amplitude is small and a 

synchronous trigger is required (to a scope for example). This output is active even when

the SR865 is locked to an external reference.

BlazeX

The BlazeX output is a ±2V, low latency version of the X output. It’s intended for 

experiments that require the fastest possible output response, such as feedback loops that 

employ the SR865 within the loop. The BlazeX output is always an RC filter (1 to 4 

poles) regardless of the front panel Advanced Filter setting, and its maximum time 

constant is 10 ms. If a longer time constant is required, the normal X output should be 

used instead. 

The BlazeX output is modified by offset and expand, but is not affected by the ratio 

function.

Preamp Connector

This 9 pin connector provides power to external preamplifiers such as the SR550 and 

SR552. The power connections are described below.

Pin

1 +18.5 V

Voltage

2 +5 V

6 −18.5 V

7 Signal Ground

8 Ground

Using SRS Preamps

When using an SRS preamp, connect the power cable (standard male-to-male 9 pin D 

connectors) from the preamp to the rear panel preamp connector on the SR865. Use BNC 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 3 Operation 99

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

cables to connect the A output from the preamp to the A input of the SR865 and the B 

output from the preamp (preamp ground) to the B input of the SR865. Use A−B as the 

input configuration. Be sure to twist the A and B cables so that there is no differential 

noise pickup between the cables.

The signal coupling and input impedance is now determined by the preamp.

The SR865 does NOT compensate for the gain of the preamp. The preamps will default 

to their maximum gain. Measurements made by the SR865 with a preamp need to be 

divided by the gain of the preamp.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Programming 101

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Chapter 4 

Programming

Introduction

The SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier may be remotely programmed via the RS-232, GPIB 

(IEEE-488), USB or ethernet interfaces. Any computer supporting one of these interfaces 

may be used to program the SR865. All interfaces can receive commands at all times and

the SR865 will send responses to the querying interface only. A few specialized 

commands such as interface status and data streaming are interface specific. Most 

instrument commands are common to all interfaces.

Communicating With GPIB

The SR865 supports the IEEE-488.2 (2004) interface standard. The SR865's device 

address must be set in the system menu (hold [Calc/system]).

Communicating With RS-232

The RS-232 interface baud rate and parity must be set in the system menu (hold 

[Calc/system]). The RS-232 word length is always 8 bits. The transmit terminator 

character(s) may also be specified.

Communicating With USB

The SR865 is a Test and Measurement Class instrument and easily interfaces with 

LabVIEW, NI-VISA and Matlab.

Communicating With Ethernet

The SR865 supports VXI-11 and telnet and interfaces easily with LabVIEW, NI-VISA 

and Matlab. In addition, SR865 has a built in webserver. Data streaming over ethernet is 

also supported.

Before attempting to communicate with the SR865 over the ethernet interface, the 

instrument IP address must be set in the system menu (hold [Calc/system]). Additional 

settings for ethernet operation must also be set.

Status Indicators

To assist in programming, the SR865 has 3 interface status indicators. The Activity

indicator flashes whenever any interface is actively sending or receiving. The Error

indicator flashes when an error, such as an illegal command, or parameter out of range, is

detected. The Remote indicator is on whenever the SR865 is in a remote state (front 

panel locked out). 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
102 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

GPIB Interface Ready And Status

The Interface Ready bit (bit 1) in the Serial Poll Status Byte signals that the SR865 is 

ready to receive and execute a command. When a command is received, this bit is cleared 

indicating that an operation is in progress. While the operation is in progress, no other 

commands will be received. Only GPIB serial polling will generate a response while a 

command is in progress. When the command execution terminates, the Interface Ready 

bit is set again and new commands can be received. Since most commands execute very 

quickly, the host computer does not need to continually check the Interface Ready bit. 

When using the GPIB interface, serial polling may be used to check the Interface Ready 

bit in the Serial Poll Byte while an operation is in progress. After the Interface Ready bit 

becomes set, signaling the completion of the command, then the ERR or ESB bit may be 

checked to verify successful completion of the command.

If an interface other than GPIB is used, then serial polling is not available. The ∗STB?, 

∗ESR?, ERRS?, and LIAS? status query commands may be used to query the Status 

Bytes. Since the SR865 processes one command at a time, the status query will not be 

processed until the previous operation is finished. Thus a response to the status query in 

itself signals that the previous command is finished. The query response may then be 

checked for various errors.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 103

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Command Syntax

A command to the SR865 consists of a command mnemonic, a space followed by 

arguments if necessary, and a command terminator. There MUST be at least one space 

between the command and the first argument. Multiple arguments are separated by 

commas. Some commands have no arguments. The command terminator must be a 

linefeed <lf> on RS-232, or a linefeed <lf> or EOI on GPIB. No command processing 

occurs until a command terminator is received.

Commands function identically on all interfaces whenever possible. Command 

mnemonics beginning with an asterisk ‘∗’ are IEEE-488.2 defined common commands. 

These commands also function identically on the other interfaces. 

Multiple commands may be sent on one command line by separating them with 

semicolons (;).

The present value of a particular parameter may be determined by querying the SR865 

for its value. A query is formed by appending a question mark ‘?’ to the command 

mnemonic and omitting the desired parameter(s) from the command. No space is allowed 

between the command and the ‘?’. Values returned by the SR865 are sent as a string of 

ASCII characters. If multiple queries are sent on one command line (separated by 

semicolons, of course) the responses will be returned as semicolon-separated strings. 

Command Conventions

Commands and arguments may be in either UPPER or lower case.

Arguments shown in { } are optional or may be queried.

Arguments in [ ] are required. 

A list of allowable enumerated values is shown as A | B | C. The argument can be either 

A or B or C.

Commands that may be queried have a question mark in parentheses (?) after the 

mnemonic. Commands that may ONLY be queried have a ? after the mnemonic, without 

parentheses. NO SPACE is allowed between the mnemonic and the ?. Commands that 

MAY NOT be queried have no ?.

Do NOT send ( ) or { } or [ ] or | as part of the command. A space is required 

between a command and its arguments.

Variables

i, j, k, l, m, n integers

x real number

f frequency (real number)

p phase (real number)

v voltage (real number)

s “string”

Integer variables must be expressed in integer format (no decimal point or exponent).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
104 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Real number variables may be expressed in integer, floating point or exponential formats 

( i.e., the number five can be either 5, 5.0, or .5E1).

Strings are a sequence of ASCII characters within quotes (“...”).

Units

For numerical values of frequency, phase or volts, a units string may be appended to a set 

command. If the unit string is omitted then the value is assumed to be the base unit, either 

Hz, degrees or Volts. The accepted unit strings are:

“NV” nanoVolts “HZ” Hertz “UDEG” microDegrees

“UV” microVolts “KHZ” kiloHertz “MDEG” milliDegrees

“MV” milliVolts “MHZ” megaHertz “DEG” Degrees

“V” Volts

For example, the following commands to set the internal frequency are all equivalent

FREQ 1234.56

FREQ 1234.56 HZ

FREQ 1.23456 KHZ

Queries of f, p or v always return the value in the base units of Hz, degrees or Volts.

Enumerated Strings

Many commands have an enumerated list of allowed settings. It is possible to specify the 

setting with a string instead of the integer index. Using the enumeration strings improves 

the readability of your source code.

Enumerated strings can either be the substring shown in CAPS or the full string. For 

example, the enumeration string “ABCDefgh” can be sent as ‘abcd’ or ‘abcdefgh’. The 

string can be sent with any capitalization.

For example, the IVMD i command sets the input to either voltage (i=0) or current (i=1). 

This command is specified as

IVMD(?) { VOLTage | CURRent | i }

The following commands are all equivalent ways to set the input to voltage.

IVMD 0

IVMD VOLT

IVMD VOLTAGE

These commands are all equivalent ways to set the input to current.

IVMD 1

IVMD CURR

IVMD CURRENT

The IVMD? query always returns the setting index i (0 or 1 in this case).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 105

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example Commands

RSRC 1 Set reference source to external

RSRC EXT

RSRC ? Query the reference source

FREQ 10E3 Set the internal reference frequency to 10000 Hz

FREQ 10 KHZ

FREQ 10000.0

APHS Execute Auto Phase

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
106 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Reference Commands

TBMODE(?) { AUTO | INternal | i }

The TBMODE i command sets the external 10 MHz timebase mode to auto (i=0) or 

internal (i=1).

Example

TBMODE AUTO Set the timebase mode to auto

TBMODE 0

TBMODE? Returns the timebase mode i

TBSTAT?

The TBSTAT? query returns the current 10 MHz timebase source, either external (0) or 

internal (1).

Example

TBSTAT? Returns the current 10 MHz timebase

PHAS(?) { p } { UDEG | MDEG | DEG | URAD | MRAD | RAD }

The PHAS p command sets the reference phase shift to p degrees. The value of p is set 

with a resolution of ~0.0000001°. The phase may be programmed from 

−360000° ≤ p ≤ 360000° and will be wrapped around at ±180°. For example, the 

PHAS 541.0 command will set the phase to −179.00° (541−360 = 181; 181−360 =

−179). Phase may be specified in degrees (default), or millidegrees, microdegrees, 

radians, milliradians, or microradians.

Example

PHAS 12.34 DEG Set the reference phase to 12.34 deg

PHAS 1.234E1

PHAS 12340 MDEG

PHAS? Returns the reference phase in degrees

APHS

The APHS command performs the Auto Phase function. This command is the same as 

pressing the [Auto Phase] key. The outputs will take many time constants to reach their 

new values. Do not send the command again without waiting the appropriate amount of 

time. 

FREQ(?) { f } { HZ | KHZ | MHZ }

The FREQ f command sets the internal frequency to f. The value of f will be rounded to 6 

digits or 0.1 mHz, whichever is greater. The value of f is limited to 1 mHz ≤ f ≤ 2.5 MHz.

The query form, FREQ?, returns the internal reference frequency whenever the reference 

mode is either Internal, Dual, or Chop. The query returns the external frequency when 

operating in External mode. This behavior mirrors the value displayed in the info bar at 

the top of the display.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 107

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

FREQ 12.34E3 Set the internal frequency to 12.34 kHz

FREQ 12.34 KHZ

FREQ 12340

FREQ? Returns the internal (or external) frequency in Hz

FREQINT(?) { f } { HZ | KHZ | MHZ }

The FREQINT f command sets the internal frequency to f. The value of f will be rounded 

to 6 digits or 0.1 mHz, whichever is greater. The value of f is limited to 1 mHz ≤ f ≤ 

2.5 MHz.

The query form, FREQINT?, always returns the internal reference frequency.

Example

FREQINT 12.34E3 Set the internal frequency to 12.34 kHz

FREQINT 12.34 KHZ

FREQINT 12340

FREQINT? Returns the internal frequency in Hz

FREQEXT?

The FREQEXT? query returns the external reference frequency.

Example

FREQEXT? Returns the external frequency in Hz

FREQDET?

The FREQDET? query returns the actual detection frequency. This is helpful in dual 

reference mode or harmonic detection. Otherwise, the detection frequency is either the 

internal or external reference frequency.

Example

FREQDET? Returns the detection frequency in Hz

HARM(?) { i }

The HARM i command will set the lock-in to detect at the ith harmonic of the reference 

frequency. The value of i is limited to 1 ≤ i ≤ 99. 

Example

HARM 2 Set the harmonic detect to 2

HARM? Returns the harmonic number i

HARMDUAL(?) { i }

The HARMDUAL i command will set the lock-in to detect at the ith harmonic of the 

external frequency in dual reference mode. The value of i is limited to 1 ≤ i ≤ 99. The 

actual detection frequency, when operating in dual reference mode, is

detect HARM int HARMDUAL ext f = i × f − i × f

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
108 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

HARMDUAL 2 Set the dual external harmonic detect to 2

HARMDUAL? Returns the dual external harmonic number i

BLADESLOTS(?) {SLT6 | SLT30 | i }

The BLADESLOTS i command configures the lock-in for operation with an external 

SR540 chopper. Before proper operation in RSRC EXT mode, the SR865 must be 

configured for either 6-slot (i=0) or 30-slot (i=1) operation, based on the hardware 

installed on the SR540 chopper. You can read more about operation in chop mode on 

page 76.

Example

BLADESLOTS SLT30 Configure for 30-slot chopper blade

BLADESLOTS 1

BLADESLOTS? Returns chopper blade configuration

BLADEPHASE(?) { p } { UDEG | MDEG | DEG | URAD | MRAD | RAD }

The BLADEPHASE p command sets the phase of the SR540 chopper blade. When 

operating a single chopper, this has little effect since the SR865 will follow the chopper. 

If multiple SR865/SR540 systems are being used in a single experiment, BLADEPHASE

can be used to modify the relative phase of the choppers. Blade phase may be specified in 

degrees (default), or millidegrees, microdegrees, radians, milliradians, or 

microradians.You can read more about chopper blade phase on page 77.

Example

BLADEPHASE 43.21 DEG Set the blade phase to 43.21 deg

BLADESLOTS 4.321E1

BLADEPHASE? Returns chopper blade phase

SLVL(?) { v } { NV | UV | MV | V }

The SLVL v command sets the sine out amplitude to v. The value of v will be rounded to 

3 digits or 1 nV, whichever is greater. The amplitude may be programmed from 1 nV to 

2.0 V.

Example

SLVL 12.3 MV Set the sine out amplitude to 12.34 mV

SLVL 1.23E-2

SLVL 0.0123

SLVL? Returns the sine out amplitude in Volts

SOFF(?) { v } { NV | UV | MV | V }

The SOFF v command sets the sine out dc level to v. The value of v will be rounded to 3 

digits or 0.1 mV, whichever is greater. The level may be programmed from −5.00 V to 

+5.00 V.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 109

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

SOFF 34.5 MV Set the sine out dc level to 34.5 mV

SOFF 3.45E-2

SOFF 0.0345

SOFF? Returns the sine out dc level in Volts

REFM(?) { COMmon | DIFference | i }

The REFM i command sets the sine out dc mode to common (i=0) or difference (i=1).

Example

REFM DIF Set the dc mode to difference

REFM DIFFERENCE

REFM 1

REFM? Returns the dc mode i

RSRC(?) { INT | EXT | DUAL | CHOP | i }

The RSRC i command sets the reference source to internal (i=0), external (i=1), dual 

(i=2) or chop (i=3).

Example

RSRC EXT Set the reference mode to external

RSRC 1

RSRC? Returns the reference mode i

RTRG(?) { SIN | POSttl | NEGttl | i }

The RTRG i command sets the external reference trigger mode to sine (i=0), positive 

TTL (i=1) or negative TTL (i=2).

Example

RTRG POS Set the external reference trigger to positive TTL

RTRG POSTTL

RTRG 1

RTRG? Returns the external reference trigger mode i

REFZ(?) { 50ohms | 1Meg | i }

The REFZ i command sets the external reference trigger input to 50 Ω (i=0) or 

1 MΩ (i=1).

Example

REFZ 50 Set the external reference input to 50 Ω

REFZ 50OHMS

REFZ 0

REFZ 1M Set the external reference input to 1 MΩ

REFZ 1MEG

REFZ? Returns the external reference input i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
110 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

PSTF(?) [ j ] { , f { HZ | KHZ | MHZ } }

The PSTF j, f command sets a frequency preset to f. These preset buttons are available 

whenever the internal frequency keypad is displayed. The parameter j (0–3) selects a 

preset F1–F4. The value of f will be rounded to 6 digits or 0.1 mHz, whichever is greater. 

The value of f is limited to 1 mHz ≤ f ≤ 2.5 MHz.

Example

PSTF 1, 12.34 KHZ Set frequency preset F2 to 12.34 kHz

PSTF 1, 12340

PSTF? 1 Returns the frequency preset F2 in Hz

PSTA(?) [ j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The PSTA j, v command sets a sine out amplitude preset to v. These preset buttons are 

available whenever the sine out amplitude keypad is displayed. The parameter j (0–3) 

selects a preset A1–A4. The value of v will be rounded to 3 digits or 1 nV, whichever is 

greater. The value of v is limited to 1 nV ≤ v ≤ 2.0 V.

Example

PSTA 2, 12.3 MV Set amplitude preset A3 to 12.3 mV

PSTA 2, 0.0123

PSTA? 2 Returns the amplitude preset A3 in Volts

PSTL(?) [ j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The PSTL j, v command sets a sine out dc level preset to v. These preset buttons are 

available whenever the sine out dc level keypad is displayed. The parameter j (0–3) 

selects a preset L1–L4. The value of v will be rounded to 3 digits or 0.1 mV, whichever is 

greater. The levels may be programmed from −5.00 V to +5.00 V.

Example

PSTL 0, 1.23 V Set dc level preset L1 to 1.23 V

PSTL 0, 1230 MV

PSTL? 0 Returns the dc level preset L1 in Volts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 111

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Signal Commands

IVMD(?) { VOLTage | CURRent | i }

The IVMD i command sets the signal input to voltage (i=0) or current (i=1).

Example

IVMD VOLT Set the signal input to voltage

IVMD VOLTAGE

IVMD 0

IVMD? Returns the signal input i

ISRC(?) { A | A−B | i }

The ISRC i command sets the voltage input mode to A (i=0) or A−B (i=1).

Example

ISRC A−B Set the voltage input to A−B

ISRC 1

ISRC? Returns the voltage input mode i

ICPL(?) { AC | DC | i }

The ICPL i command sets the voltage input coupling to ac (i=0) or dc (i=1).

Example

ICPL DC Set the voltage input coupling to dc

ICPL 1

ICPL? Returns the voltage input coupling mode i

IGND(?) { FLOat | GROund | i }

The IGND i command sets the voltage input shields to float (i=0) or ground (i=1).

Example

IGND FLO Set the voltage input shields to float

IGND FLOAT

IGND 0

IGND? Returns the voltage input grounding mode i

IRNG(?) { 1Volt | 300Mvolt | 100Mvolt | 30Mvolt | 10Mvolt | i }

The IRNG i command sets the voltage input range to 1 V (i=0), 300 mV (i=1), 

100 mV (i=2), 30 mV (i=3) or 10 mV (i=4).

Example

IRNG 1V Set the voltage input range to 1 V

IRNG 1VOLT

IRNG 0

IRNG? Returns the voltage input range i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
112 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

ICUR(?) { 1MEG | 100MEG | i }

The ICUR i command sets the current input gain to 1 MΩ (1 μA) (i=0) or 100 MΩ 

(10 nA) (i=1).

Example

ICUR 100MEG Set the current input gain to 100 MΩ (10 nA)

ICUR 1

ICUR? Returns the current input gain i

ILVL?

The ILVL? query returns the signal strength indicator from lowest (0) to overload (4).

Example

ILVL? Returns the signal strength indication

SCAL(?) { i }

The SCAL i command sets the sensitivity according to the table below.

i sensitivity i

0 1 V [μA] 15 10 μV [pA]

sensitivity

1 500 mV [nA] 16 5 μV [pA]

2 200 mV [nA] 17 2 μV [pA]

3 100 mV [nA] 18 1 μV [pA]

4 50 mV [nA] 19 500 nV [fA]

5 20 mV [nA] 20 200 nV [fA]

6 10 mV [nA] 21 100 nV [fA]

7 5 mV [nA] 22 50 nV [fA]

8 2 mV [nA] 23 20 nV [fA]

9 1 mV [nA] 24 10 nV [fA]

10 500 μV [pA] 25 5 nV [fA]

11 200 μV [pA] 26 2 nV [fA]

12 100 μV [pA] 27 1 nV [fA]

13 50 μV [pA]

14 20 μV [pA]

Example

SCAL 6 Set the sensitivity to 10 mV [nA]

SCAL? Returns the sensitivity i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 113

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

OFLT(?) { i }

The OFLT i command sets the time constant according to the table below.

i time constant i time constant i

0 1 μs 8 10 ms 16 100 s

time constant

1 3 μs 9 30 ms 17 300 s

2 10 μs 10 100 ms 18 1 ks

3 30 μs 11 300 ms 19 3 ks

4 100 μs 12 1 s 20 10 ks

5 300 μs 13 3 s 21 30 ks

6 1 ms 14 10 s

7 3 ms 15 30 s

Example

OFLT 10 Set the time constant to 100 ms

OFLT? Returns the time constant i

OFSL(?) { i }

The OFSL i command sets the filter slope to 6 dB/oct (i=0), 12 dB/oct (i=1), 18 dB/oct 

(i=2) or 24 dB/oct (i=3).

Example

OFSL 1 Set the filter slope to 12 dB/oct

OFSL? Returns the filter slope i

SYNC(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The SYNC i command turns the synchronous filter off (i=0) or on (i=1).

Example

SYNC ON Set the synchronous filter to on

SYNC 1

SYNC? Returns the state of the synchronous filter i

ADVFILT(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The ADVFILT i command turns the advanced filter off (i=0) or on (i=1).

Example

ADVFILT ON Set the advanced filter to on

ADVFILT 1

ADVFILT? Returns the state of the advanced filter i

ENBW?

The ENBW? query returns the equivalent noise bandwidth of the output filter, in hertz. 

Note that the effect of the SYNC filter is neglected by ENBW?

Example

ENBW? Returns the equivalent noise bandwidth, in hertz.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
114 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CH1/CH2 Output Commands

COUT(?) [ OCH1 | OCH2 | j ] { , XY | RTHeta | i }

The COUT j, i command sets CH1 (j=0) or CH2 (j=1) to either XY (i=0) or Rθ (i=1).

Example

COUT OCH2, RTHeta Set CH2 to θ

COUT 1, 1

COUT 0, RTH Set CH1 to R

COUT 0, XY Set CH1 to X

COUT? 1 Returns the CH2 output i

COUT? OCH2

CEXP(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , OFF | X10 | X100 | i }

The CEXP j, i command sets the output expand for X (j=0), Y (j=1) or R (j=2) to off 

(i=0), X10 (i=1) or X100 (i=2). Setting an expand for phase is not allowed.

Example

CEXP Y, X100 Set Y expand to X100

CEXP 1, 2

CEXP? 1 Returns the Y expand mode i

CEXP? Y

COFA(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , OFF | ON | i }

The COFA j, i command turns the output offset for X (j=0), Y (j=1), or R (j=2) to off 

(i=0) or on (i=1). Setting an offset for phase is not allowed.

Example

COFA X, ON Set X output offset to on

COFA 0, 1

COFA? 0 Returns the X output offset state i

COFA? X

COFP(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , x }

The COFP j, x command sets the output offset percentage for X (j=0), Y (j=1), or R (j=2) 

to x percent. The value of x is limited to −999.99 to +999.99 with 0.01 resolution.

Example

COFP X, 12.34 Set X output offset to 12.34%

COFA 0, 12.34

COFP? 0 Returns the X output offset percentage x

COFP? X

OAUT [ X | Y | R | j ]

The OAUT j command auto offsets X (j=0), Y (j=1), or R (j=2). This is the same as Auto 

Offset in the offset keypad display.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 115

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CRAT(?) [ X | Y | R | j ] { , OFF | ON | i }

The CRAT j, i command turns the ratio function for X (j=0), Y (j=1), or R (j=2) to off 

(i=0) or on (i=1). Setting an ratio for phase is not allowed.

The ratio function for X and Y are tied to aux input voltage 3, following the equation

Expand 10V

1.000 V

Aux In 3

Offset

Sensitivity

X orY

Output × ×





























 





−

=

The ratio function for R is similar, but is tied to aux input voltage 4:

Expand 10V

1.000 V

Aux In 4

Offset

Sensitivity

R

Output × ×





























 





−

=

Example

CRAT X, ON Set X ratio mode to on

CRAT 0, 1

CRAT? 0 Returns the X ratio mode

CRAT? X

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
116 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Aux Input and Output Commands

OAUX? [ j ]

The OAUX? j query returns an aux input voltage. The parameter j (0–3) selects aux input 

1–4 on the rear panel.

Example

OAUX? 0 Returns the aux in1 voltage v

OAUX? 1 Returns the aux in2 voltage v

AUXV(?) [ j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The AUXV? j, v command sets an aux output to voltage v. The parameter j (0–3) selects 

aux output 1–4 on the rear panel. The voltage v can be set from –10.5 V to +10.5 V.

Example

AUXV 2, 678.9 MV Set aux out3 to 678.9 mV

AUXV 2, 6.789E-1

AUXV 2, 0.6789

AUXV? 2 Returns the aux out3 voltage setting in Volts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 117

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Auto Function Commands

APHS

The APHS command performs the Auto Phase function. This command is the same as 

pressing the [Auto Phase] key. The outputs may take many time constants to reach their 

new values. Do not send the command again without waiting the appropriate amount of 

time. 

ARNG

The ARNG command performs the Auto Range function. This command is the same as 

pressing the [Auto Range] key. The outputs may take many time constants to return to

their steady state values. 

ASCL

The ASCL command performs the Auto Scale function. This command is the same as 

pressing the [Auto Scale] key. This automatically sets the sensitivity. Measurements with 

the synchronous filter on or measurements of Xnoise or Ynoise may take many time 

constants to return to their steady state values.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
118 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Display Commands

DBLK(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The DBLK i command turns front panel blanking off (i=0) or on (i=1). 

Example

DBLK OFF Turn blanking off (displays on)

DBLK 1 Turn blanking on (displays off)

DBLK? Returns the blanking state i

DLAY(?) { TREnd | HISTory | BARHist | FFT | BARFft | BAREight | i }

The DLAY i command sets the screen layout to trend (i=0), full strip chart history (i=1), 

half strip chart history (i=2), full FFT (i=3), half FFT (i=4) or big numerical (i=5). 

Example

DLAY HIST Set the screen layout to full screen strip chart history

DLAY 1

DLAY? Returns the screen layout i

DCAP

The DCAP command saves a screenshot to a USB memory stick. This command is the 

same as pressing the [Screen Shot] key. A USB memory stick must be present in the front 

panel USB port.

CDSP(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , parameter | i }

The CDSP j, param command assigns a parameter to data channel j. This is the same 

parameter assignment as pressing the [Config] key.

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

The parameter list is

i enumeration parameter i enumeration

0 X X output 9 OUT2 Aux Out2

parameter

1 Y Youtput 10 XNOise Xnoise

2 R R output 11 YNOise Ynoise

3 THETa θ output 12 PHAse Reference Phase

4 IN1 Aux In1 13 SAMp Sine Out Amplitude

5 IN2 Aux In2 14 LEVel DC Level

6 IN3 Aux In3 15 FInt Internal Reference Frequency

7 IN4 Aux In4 16 FExt External Reference Frequency

8 OUT1 Aux Out1

Example

CDSP DAT2, IN2 Assign Aux In2 to data channel 2 (blue)

CDSP 3, 15 Assign the Reference Frequency to data channel 4 (orange)

CDSP DAT1, SAM Assign the Sine Out Amplitude to data channel 1 (green)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 119

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CDSP? 1 Returns the parameter index assigned to data channel 2 (blue)

CDSP? DAT2

CGRF(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , OFF | ON | i }

The CGRF j, i command turns the strip chart graph of data channel j off (i=0) or on (i=1).

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

CGRF DAT2, ON Turn graphing on for data channel 2 (blue)

CGRF 1, 1

CGRF 0, OFF Turn graphing off for data channel 1 (green)

CGRF? 1 Returns data channel 2 (blue) graphing state i

CGRF? DAT2

GETSCREEN?

The GETSCREEN? query creates and returns a screen image as a binary block of data in 

BMP file format. This query cannot be executed over the RS-232 interface. The file 

image is the same as is written to a USB memory stick upon pressing the [Screen Shot] 

key.

After sending GETSCREEN?, the user’s remote program should repeatedly perform a 

Status Byte query, either by serial poll, or through the VISA Read STB function—but not

with the *STB? query—until the MAV bit becomes set. Note that it may take several 

seconds before MAV is set. Once the MAV bit is set in the Status Byte, the user may then 

read the binary block data. The binary block is in the following format:

#ncccccxxxxxxx

Where “#” is the hash character (character code 35), “n” is a single digit specifying the 

number of digits to follow in the block length count; “ccccc” is the n–digit integer size 

of the binary block to follow, and “xxxxxxx” is the ccccc–byte binary image file itself. 

This binary image should be saved as a .BMP format file.

Example

GETSCREEN? Request a screen capture file

The SR865 responds with

#535219xxxxxxx

corresponding to a 35219-byte .BMP file image (the “xxxxxxx” data).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
120 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Strip Chart Commands

GSPD(?) { i }

The GSPD i command sets the horizontal time/div according to the table below.

i time/div i

0 0.5 s 9 10 min

time/div

1 1 s 10 30 min

2 2 s 11 1 hour

3 5 s 12 2 hour

4 10 s 13 6 hour

5 30 s 14 12 hour

6 1 min 15 1 day 

7 2 min 16 2 day

8 5 min

Example

GSPD 6 Set the strip chart to 1 min/div horizontal scale

GSPD? Returns the horizontal scale i

GSCL(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , x }

The GSCL j, x command sets the vertical scale of data channel j to x/div. The scale will 

be set to the nearest allowed scale in a 1-2-5 sequence.

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

GSCL DAT2, 0.1 Set the vertical scale for data channel 2 (blue) to 0.1/div

GSCL 1, 0.09

GSCL 1, 0.12

GSCL? 1 Returns the vertical scale for data channel 2 (blue)

GSCL? DAT2

GOFF(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , x }

The GOFF j, x command sets the vertical offset of data channel j to x.

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

GOFF DAT3, 0.1 Set the vertical offset for data channel 3 (yellow) to 0.1

GOFF 2, 0.1

GOFF? 2 Returns the vertical offset for data channel 3 (yellow)

GOFF? DAT3

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 121

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

GAUT [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ]

The GAUT j command performs an Auto Scale on data channel j. This command is the 

same as pressing the button in the scale palette. 

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

GAUT DAT3 Auto Scale data channel 3 (yellow) 

GAUT 2

GACT [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ]

The GACT j command performs an Auto Scale keeping zero at the center on data 

channel j. This command is the same as pressing the button in the scale palette. 

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

GACT DAT1 Auto Scale zero center data channel 1 (green) 

GACT 0

GAUF [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ]

The GAUF j command performs an Auto Find on data channel j. This command is the 

same as pressing the button in the scale palette. 

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

GAUF DAT4 Auto Find data channel 4 (orange) 

GAUF 3

CGRF(?) [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ] { , { OFF | ON | i } }

The CGRF j, i command turns the graph of data channel j off (i=0) or on (i=1).

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

CGRF DAT2, ON Turn graphing on for data channel 2 (blue)

CGRF 1, 1

CGRF 0, OFF Turn graphing off for data channel 1 (green)

CGRF? 1 Returns data channel 2 (blue) graphing state i

CGRF? DAT2

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
122 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

GLIV(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The GLIV i command pauses (i=0) or resumes (i=1) the strip chart. 

Example

GLIV OFF Pause the strip chart

GLIV 0

GLIV? Returns the strip chart state i

PCUR(?) { i }

The PCUR i command sets the strip chart cursor position i. The right edge is i=0 and the 

left edge is i=639. The cursor is visible only when the chart is paused.

Example

PCUR 319 Set the strip chart cursor to the middle of the chart

PCUR? Returns the strip cursor position i

CURREL(?) {OFF | ON | i}

The CURREL i command selects relative (i=1) or absolute (i=0) mode for the strip chart 

cursor. The cursor is visible only when the chart is paused.

If the chart is paused when CURREL transitions from 0 to 1, then the reference marker is 

located at the present cursor position (set by PCUR). If the chart is live, then the marker 

is set to the most current bin location (corresponding to the right and edge of the chart); 

the marker, however, will not become visible until the chart is paused.

Example

CURREL ON Set cursor to relative mode

CURREL 1

CURREL? Returns the cursor relative mode state i

CURDISP(?) {i}

The CURDISP i command sets the cursor horizontal position display mode to date and 

time (i=0) or interval time (i=1).

Example

CURDISP 0 Set cursor horizontal position to date and time mode

CURDISP? Returns the cursor horizontal position display mode i

CURBUG(?) {AVG | MAX | MIN | i}

The CURBUG i command selects the strip chart cursor readout mode to mean (i=0), 

maximum (i=1) or minimum (i=2). This command is the same as pressing in the 

horizontal scale palette.

Each pixel represents data collected over the time elapsed for one pixel of horizontal 

scrolling (set by the GSPD command). CURBUG determines whether the cursor readout 

shows the mean, maximum, or minimum value of the data from within each pixel.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 123

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

CURBUG MAX Set cursor readout to maximum value

CURBUG 1

CURBUG? Returns the cursor readout mode i

FCRW(?) { LIne | NARrow | WIde | i }

The FCRW i command sets the cursor width to line (i=0), narrow (i=1) or wide (i=2).

This command is the same as pressing in the horizontal scale palette.

Example

FCRW NAR Set the cursor to narrow

FCRW 1

FCRW? Returns the cursor width i

SCRY? [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | STATus | j ]

The SCRY? j query returns the strip chart cursor value of data channel j.

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels. Querying SCRY? STAT (j=4) returns 0 if there is no 

overload or unlock at the cursor positon. The cursor is only available when the strip chart 

is paused.

The status response encodes three distinct sources that cause the violet error mark to 

appear at the bottom of the strip chart display:

Bit Weight Definition

0 1 Timebase error

1 2 External reference unlock

2 4 Signal overload

3 8 Sync filter error

Example

SCRY? DAT2 Returns the cursor value of data channel 2 (blue)

SCRY? STATUS Returns the error status for the current cursor position

CURDATTIM?

The CURDATTIM? query returns the strip chart cursor horizontal date and time as a 

string. This string is in the format 

28Apr14,14:25:35.96

In this example, the date is 28 April 2014, and the time is 14:25:35.96 (2:25 PM). 

Performing the CURDATTIM? query when the display is not paused generates a 

parameter range error.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
124 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CURINTERVAL?

The CURINTERVAL? query returns the strip chart cursor horizontal position as a string. 

This string is in the format 

-2d 16:07:30.00

In this example, the cursor position is 2 days, 16 hours, 7 minutes, and 30 seconds before 

the chart was paused (corresponding to PCUR=171 on the 1 day/division GSPD=15 

chart).

When the cursor is in relative mode, CURINTERVAL? returns the interval between the 

cursor position and the marker position. Performing the CURINTERVAL? query when the 

display is not paused generates a parameter range error.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 125

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

FFT Screen Commands

The SR865 has a basic FFT function accessable from the front panel by selecting the appropriate [Screen 

Layout] display (remotely, by setting DLAY FFT or DLAY BARFFT). A more complete discussion of FFT 

mode can be found in Appendix B .

Note that while FFT configuration commands and queries may be sent at any time, the FFT data query 

(FCRY?) only returns valid data while the display is showing the FFT.

FFTR(?) { ADC | MIXer | FILTer | i }

The FFTR i command sets the source for the FFT to input ADC (i=0), post mixer PSD

(i=1) or post time constant filter (i=2). 

Example

FFTR FILT Set the FFT source to post time constant filter

FFTR 2

FFTR? Returns the FFT source i

FFTS(?) { i }

The FFTS i command sets the FFT vertical scale (dB/div) according to the table below.

i dB/div i

-8 2 m 0 1.0

dB/div

-7 5m 1 2.0

-6 10 m 2 5.0

-5 20 m 3 10

-4 50 m 4 20

-3 100 m 5 50

-2 200 m 6 100 

-1 500 m 7 200

The argument i is limited to −20 ≤ i ≤ 20. Vertical scale changes preserve the amplitude 

of the top edge of the graph.

Example

FFTS 4 Set the FFT vertical scale to 20 dB/div

FFTS? Returns the FFT vertical scale i

FFTO(?) { x }

The FFTO x command sets the FFT vertical offset x (dB). This is the amplitude

associated with the top edge of the graph.

Example

FFTO -20.0 Set the FFT vertical offset to −20.0 dB

FFTO? Returns the FFT vertical offset 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
126 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

FAUT

The FAUT command performs an Auto Scale on the FFT display. This command is the 

same as pressing the button in the FFT vertical scale palette. 

FFTMAXSPAN?

The FFTMAXSPAN? query returns the maximum allowed FFT span (Hz/div) for the 

current FFT source and lock-in configuration (time constant and reference frequency).

Example

FFTMAXSPAN? Returns the maximum allowed FFT span in Hz/div

FFTSPAN(?) { x }

The FFTSPAN x command sets the FFT span to x Hz/div. The value of x may not exceed 

the maximum allowed span (as returned by FFTMAXSPAN?). The FFT span will be set to 

the nearest allowed span (max span divided by powers of 2).

Example

FFTSPAN 305 Set the FFT span to 305.2 Hz/div

FFTSPAN? Returns the FFT span in Hz/div 

FFTA(?) { AVG1 | AVG3 | AVG10 | AVG30 | AVG100 | i }

The FFTA i command sets the FFT averaging to 1 (i=0), 3 (i=1), 10 (i=2), 30 (i=3) or 100 

(i=4).

Example

FFTA AVG3 Set the FFT averaging to 3

FFTA 1

FFTA? Returns the FFT averaging i

FFTL(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The FFTL i command pauses (i=0) or resumes (i=1) the FFT graphing. 

Example

FFTL OFF Pause the FFT graph

FFTL 0

FFTL? Returns the FFT graphing i

FCRW(?) { LIne | NARrow | WIde | i }

The FCRW i command sets the cursor width to line (i=0), narrow (i=1) or wide (i=2).

Example

FCRW NAR Set the cursor to narrow

FCRW 1

FCRW? Returns the cursor width i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 127

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

FCRX?

The FCRX? query returns the frequency value of the FFT cursor readout (in Hz). FCRX?

is a query only command. 

Example

FCRX? Returns the FFT cursor frequency value

FCRY?

The FCRY? query returns the amplitude value of the FFT cursor readout (in dB). FCRY?

is a query only command. 

Note that FCRY? only returns valid data when the SR865 display is set to FFT mode.

Example

FCRY? Returns the FFT cursor amplitude value

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
128 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Scan Commands

SCNPAR(?) { Fint | REFAmp | REFDc | OUT1 | OUT2 | i }

The SCNPAR i command sets the scan parameter to Fint (i=0), Ref Ampl (i=1), Ref dc 

(i=2), Out1 (1=3) or Out2 (i=4).

Example

SCNPAR F Set the scan parameter to Fint

SCNPAR 0

SCNPAR? Returns the scan parameter i

SCNLOG(?) { LIN | LOG | i }

The SCNLOG i command sets the scan type to linear (i=0) or logarithmic (i=1).

Example

SCNLOG LIN Set the scan type to linear

SCNLOG 0

SCNLOG? Returns the scan type i

SCNEND(?) { ONce | REpeat | UPdown | i }

The SCNEND i command sets the scan end mode to once (i=0), repeat (i=1) or up/down 

(i=2).

Example

SCNEND REPEAT Set the scan end mode to repeat

SCNLOG 1

SCNLOG? Returns the scan end mode i

SCNSEC(?) { x }

The SCNSEC x command sets the scan time to x seconds. The scan time is limited to 

20 days (1728000 seconds).

Example

SCNSEC 1234 Set the scan time to 1234 seconds (20:34)

SCNSEC 1.234E3

SCNSEC? Returns the scan time in seconds

SCNAMPATTN(?) {i}

The SCNAMPATTN i command sets the operating mode for the output attenuators when 

scanning sine out amplitude to automatic (i=0) or fixed (i=1).

Normally, the sine out hardware will automatically switch one or more balanced 

attenuators into the output signal path to optimize performace for the commanded 

amplitude. During scans, however, it can be helpful to force the attenuators to remain in a 

fixed configuration, inhibiting the relay switching that would otherwise introduce 

transients in the sine output.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 129

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

SCNAMPATTN 1 Set the scan amplitude attenuator mode to fixed

SCNAMPATTN? Returns the mode for amplitude output attenuators 

SCNDCATTN(?) {i}

The SCNDCATTN i command sets the operating mode for the output attenuators when 

scanning dc level to automatic (i=0) or fixed (i=1).

Normally, the sine out dc level hardware will automatically switch one or more balanced 

attenuators into the dc level signal path to optimize performace for the commanded level. 

During scans, however, it can be helpful to force the attenuators to remain in a fixed 

configuration, inhibiting the relay switching that would otherwise introduce transients in 

the sine output.

Example

SCNDCATTN 1 Set the scan dc level attenuator mode to fixed

SCNDCATTN? Returns the mode for dc level output attenuators 

SCNINRVL(?) {i}

The SCNINRVL i command sets the parameter update interval according to the table 

below.

i Update Interval i

0 8 ms 9 9.375 s

Update interval

1 16 ms 10 28.12 s

2 31 ms 11 56.25 s

3 78 ms 12 112.5 s

4 155 ms 13 5 m 37 s

5 469 ms 14 11 m 15 s

6 938 ms 15 22 m 30 s 

7 1.875 s 16 45 m 00 s

8 4.688 s

The parameter update interval is the approximate time spent at each scan step along the 

way during a scan.

Example

SCNINRVL 8 Set parameter update interval to 4.688 s

SCNINRVL? Returns parameter update interval index i

SCNENBL(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The SCNENBL i command turns scanning off (i=0) or on (i=1). This sets the scan 

parameter to its begin value but does not start a scan.

Example

SCNENBL ON Turn scanning on

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
130 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SCNENBL 1

SCNENBL? Returns the scanning off/on state i

SCNRUN

The SCNRUN command starts or resumes the scan. This command has no effect if the 

scan is already running.

SCNPAUSE

The SCNPAUSE command pauses the scan. This command has no effect if the scan is 

already paused.

SCNRST

The SCNRST command resets the scan, regardless of its current state (running or 

paused). This sets the scan parameter to its begin value but does not start a scan. 

SCNSTATE?

The SCNSTATE? query returns the current state of the scan, off or disabled (0), reset (1), 

running (2), paused (3) or done (4). This is a query only command.

SCNFREQ(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , f { HZ | KHZ | MHZ } }

The SCNFREQ j, f command sets the begin (j=0) or end (j=1) frequency to f. The value 

of f will be rounded to 6 digits or 0.1 mHz, whichever is greater. The value of f is limited 

to 1 mHz ≤ f ≤ 2.5 MHz.

Example

SCNFREQ BEG, 1234 Set the begin frequency to 1.234 kHz

SCNFREQ 0, 1.234 KHZ

SCNFREQ? 0 Returns the begin frequency

SCNAMP(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The SCNAMP j, v command sets the begin (j=0) or end (j=1) ref amplitude to v. The 

value of v will be rounded to 3 digits or 1 nV, whichever is greater. The value of v is 

limited to 1 nV ≤ v ≤ 2.0 V.

Example

SCNAMP END, 1.23 Set the end reference amplitude to 1.23 V

SCNAMP 1, 1230 MV

SCNAMP? 1 Returns the end reference amplitude

SCNDC(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The SCNDC j, v command sets the begin (j=0) or end (j=1) ref dc level to v. The value of 

v will be rounded to 3 digits or 0.1 mV, whichever is greater. The levels may be 

programmed from −5.00 V to +5.00 V.

Example

SCNDC BEGIN, -1.23 Set the begin reference dc level to −1.23 V

SCNDC 0, -1230 MV

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 131

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SCNDC? 0 Returns the begin reference dc level

SCNAUX1(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The SCNAUX1 j, v command sets the begin (j=0) or end (j=1) AuxOut1 value to v. The 

voltage v can be set from −10.5 V to +10.5 V with 1 mV resolution.

Example

SCNAUX1 BEG, 4.567 Set the begin AuxOut1 value to 4.567 V

SCNAUX1 0, 4567 MV

SCNAUX1? 0 Returns the begin AuxOut1 value

SCNAUX2(?) [ BEGin | END | j ] { , v { NV | UV | MV | V } }

The SCNAUX2 j, v command sets the begin (j=0) or end (j=1) AuxOut2 value to v. The 

voltage v can be set from −10.5 V to +10.5 V with 1 mV resolution.

Example

SCNAUX2 END, 4.567 Set the end AuxOut2 value to 4.567 V

SCNAUX2 1, 4567 MV

SCNAUX2? 1 Returns the end AuxOut2 value

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
132 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Data Transfer Commands

OUTR? [ DAT1 | DAT2 | DAT3 | DAT4 | j ]

The OUTR? j query returns the value of data channel j.

The value of j (0–3) corresponds to the DAT1 (green), DAT2 (blue), DAT3 (yellow) and 

DAT4 (orange) data channels.

Example

OUTR? DAT2 Returns the value of data channel 2 (blue)

OUTR? 1

OUTP? [ j ]

The OUTP? j query returns the value of a single lock-in parameter. The argument j 

selects the parameter according to the table below. The enumeration strings may be used 

instead of the integer value j.

The parameter list is

j enumeration parameter j enumeration

0 X X output 9 OUT2 Aux Out2

parameter

1 Y Youtput 10 XNOise Xnoise

2 R R output 11 YNOise Ynoise

3 THETa θ output 12 PHAse Reference Phase

4 IN1 Aux In1 13 SAMp Sine Out Amplitude

5 IN2 Aux In2 14 LEVel DC Level

6 IN3 Aux In3 15 FINT Int. Ref. Frequency

7 IN4 Aux In4 16 FEXT Ext. Ref. Frequency

8 OUT1 Aux Out1

Example

OUTP? 1 Returns the value of Y

OUTP? Y

SNAP? [ j, k ] { , l }

The SNAP? query returns the values of 2 or 3 parameters at a single instant. For example, 

SNAP? is a way to query values of X and Y (or R and θ) which are taken at the same 

time. This is important when the time constant is very short. Using the OUTP? or OUTR?

commands will result in time delays, which may be greater than the time constant, 

between reading X and Y.

The SNAP? command requires at least two arguments and at most three. The arguments 

j, k, l select the lock-in parameters as listed above (see OUTP?). The enumeration strings 

may be used instead of the integer values for j, k, l.

Example

SNAP? 0,1,4 Returns the values of X, Y and Aux In1

SNAP? X, Y, IN1

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 133

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The requested values are returned in a single string with the values separated by commas 

and in the order in which they were requested. In this example, the returned string might 

be

0.951359,0.0253297,1.234

The first value is X, the second is Y and the third is Aux In1.

Not all parameters are measured at the same rate within the SR865. The external 

frequency, for example, is only measured every reference period (at low frequencies). 

The most recent measurements for these parameters are returned by SNAP?

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
134 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Data Capture Commands

Overview

The SR865 can capture data points in an internal capture buffer. This can be up to 

1 Mpoints of (X), 512 kpoints of either (X,Y) or (R,θ) or 256 kpoints of (X,Y,R,θ). Data 

points are stored as floating point values (4 bytes per data point). The capture buffer is 

made of 2 kbyte blocks (512 total data points per block), but specified in terms of its 

overall length in kbytes—which must therefore always be an even number of kbytes. The 

buffer can be configured between 2 kbytes (512 total points) and 4 Mbytes (1,048,576 

total points).

The capture buffer is not retained when the power is turned off. 

Data Format

The captured data is stored and read in 32-bit floating point format. Data is stored and 

transferred in little endian byte order.

Capture Rate

The capture rate sets how often data points are sampled and added to the capture buffer. 

All parameters are sampled simultaneously at the same rate.The maximum capture rate is 

determined by the time constant of the SR865. Shorter time constants allow faster capture 

rates, up to a limit of 1.25 MHz. The actual capture rate can be set to the maximum 

allowed rate divided by factors of 2.

Note that if the time constant is modified during a capture, the sampling rate will change 

mid-capture. This will likely create confusing results and should be avoided.

Capture Time

The entire capture time is the buffer length (number of data points of each parameter) 

divided by the capture rate. For example, a 4 MByte buffer holds 1 M total data points. If 

X and Y are captured, the buffer holds 512 kpoints of X ,Y pairs (captured together). The 

total capture time is thus (512 kpoints)/(1.25 MHz) = 0.419 seconds.

Capture Mode

When the capture buffer becomes full, data capture can either stop or continue. 

The first case is called ‘OneShot’ (data points are captured for a single buffer length). 

When the buffer fills, data capture stops.

The second case is called ‘Continuous’. In this case, data capture continues at the end of 

the buffer. The buffer will fill and start at the beginning again, overwriting the oldest 

data. Only the most recent points will be contained in the buffer. Data is recorded until 

explicitly stopped using the CAPTURESTOP command or by hardware trigger. This can 

be useful in situations when an external event determines the end of when data should be 

captured (i.e., post-triggering).

In both cases, capture can be started with the hardware Trigger Input on the rear panel or 

immediately with a command.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 135

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Starting and Stopping Capture

The CAPTURESTART and CAPTURESTOP commands control data capture. 

CAPTURESTART specifies the capture mode and either starts capture immediately, or 

arms the SR865 to wait for a hardware trigger. The CAPTURESTOP command stops 

capture; this is required for Continuous mode, but can also be used to terminate a 

OneShot capture early. Note that the capture system will continue recording data until the 

current 2 kbyte block is filled.

Once capture has stopped (either in OneShot mode or by the CAPTURESTOP command) 

data in the buffer can be read over the interfaces. The CAPTURESTAT? query returns the 

state of the capture.

Hardware Triggering

In many situations, it is important to synchronize the beginning of data acquisition to an 

external event. The SR865 supports this with the rear-panel TRIG IN input BNC. When 

configured for hardware trigger by the CAPTURESTART command, the lock-in will wait 

for a falling edge at the BNC input before beginning the capture. The TRIG IN BNC has 

a 10 kΩ internal pull-up resistor to +3.3 V, giving users flexibility around interfacing.

When operating in OneShot mode with hardware trigger, the SR865 begins capturing 

data upon the first falling edge of TRIG IN after the CAPTURESTART command is 

executed. When the capture is finished (either by recording the set number of points, or 

after receiving the CAPTURESTOP command), the data should be downloaded from the 

SR865. Retriggering will begin overwriting the buffer.

When operating in Continuous mode with hardware trigger, the SR865 again begins 

capturing data upon the first falling edge of TRIG IN after the CAPTURESTART

command. However, in this case, the TRIG IN level must remain low for capture to 

continue. In Continuous mode with hardware trigger, a rising edge on TRIG IN (after 

capture has been triggered) has the same effect as the CAPTURESTOP command. This 

allows users the flexibility for some degree of “post triggering”, where the capture 

acquisition can run continuously until some externally-generated signal indicates to stop. 

Again, note that captures do not stop immediately, but will continue to run for a short but 

indeterminant time until the current 2 kbyte buffer is filled. Also, as with OneShot mode, 

the data should be downloaded from the SR865 after stopping. Retriggering will begin 

overwriting the buffer from the beginning of the buffer.

Aliasing Effects

In any sampled data stream, it is possible to sample a high frequency signal such that it 

will appear to be a much lower frequency. This is called aliasing.

Aliasing occurs whenever the signal being sampled contains signals at frequencies 

greater than 1/2 the sample rate. The effect is most noticeable when trying to sample an 

output frequency at or near an integer multiple of the sample rate. 

Generally, choose a capture rate higher than the time constant bandwidth. The lock-in 

time constant and filter slope should be chosen to attenuate outputs at frequencies higher 

than 1/2 the capture rate as much as possible.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
136 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

CAPTURELEN(?) { n }

The CAPTURELEN command sets or queries the capture buffer length. The value n is the 

buffer length in kilobytes (256 total data points). For example, 32 k points of X and Y is 

a total of 64 k data points (256 kbytes of buffer at 4 bytes/point) and a length of n=256. 

32 k points of X, Y, R and θ requires twice as much or a length of n=512.

Since the internal blocks that make up the buffer are 2 kbytes each, the value of n must be 

even and is limited to 1 ≤ n ≤ 4096. If n is odd, then the buffer length will be set to n+1.

Example

CAPTURELEN 256 Sets the capture buffer length to 256 kbytes or 64 k total data 

points

CAPTURELEN? Returns the buffer length n (kbytes)

CAPTURECFG(?) { X | XY | RT | XYRT | i }

The CAPTURECFG i command sets the capture configuration to X (i=0), X and Y (i=1), 

R and θ (i=2) or X, Y, R and θ (i=3).

For a given buffer length (total data points), capturing more parameters results in fewer 

points of each parameter and a shorter total capture time. The capture rate is unaffected 

by CAPTURECFG.

Example

CAPTURECFG 1 Capture X and Y

CAPTURECFG XY

CAPTURECFG? Returns the capture configuration i

CAPTURERATEMAX?

The CAPTURERATEMAX? query returns the maximum allowed capture rate (at the 

current time constant) in Hz. This is a query only command.

The actual capture rate can be this maximum rate or this rate divided by powers of 2.

Note that this maximum rate is dependent on the time constant and sync filter settings.

Example

CAPTURERATEMAX? Returns the maximum capture rate in Hz

CAPTURERATE(?) { n }

The CAPTURERATE n command sets the capture rate to the maximum rate divided by 

2n

. The value of n is limited to 0 ≤ n ≤ 20. Set n=0 for the maximum capture rate.

For example, if CAPTURERATEMAX? returns 78125, then CAPTURERATE 4 will set 

the capture rate to (78125)/(24

) = 4882.8125 Hz. Note that if the time constant is 

modified during a capture, the sampling rate will change mid-capture. 

The CAPTURERATE? query returns the actual capture rate in Hz (not the value n).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 137

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

CAPTURERATE 4 Sets the capture rate to the max rate divided by 24

CAPTURERATE? Returns the actual capture rate in Hz

CAPTURESTART [ ONEshot | CONTinuous | i ] , [ OFF | ON | j ]

The CAPTURESTART i, j command starts data capture in either OneShot (i=0) or 

Continiuous (i=1) mode. The parameter j selects whether capture starts immediately 

(hardware trigger OFF, j=0) or waits for a trigger (hardware trigger ON, j=1). 

The hardware trigger is a TTL input on the rear panel. A falling edge triggers the 

beginning of capture. When operating in CAPTURESTART 1,1 mode (Continuous 

capture and hardware trigger), the capture will be stopped when the TTL input returns 

high or by receiving the CAPTURESTOP command.

Both parameters i and j are required in this command.

This command clears any previously captured data and starts a new capture.

When operating in CAPTURESTART 1,1 mode (Continuous capture and hardware 

trigger), the capture will be stopped when the TTL input returns high or by receiving the 

CAPTURESTOP command.

Example

CAPTURESTART ONE, OFF Starts OneShot capture immediately

CAPTURESTART 0, 0

CAPTURESTOP

The CAPTURESTOP command stops data capture. 

If the capture is waiting for a hardware trigger, then the capture is aborted and the trigger 

will be ignored. 

If capture is in progress, then capture is halted. Any data already captured is preserved 

and may be read. Capture is stopped at the next 2 kbyte boundary (512 total data points).

Example

CAPTURESTOP Stop data capture at the next 2 kB boundary

CAPTURESTAT?

The CAPTURESTAT? query returns the data capture state. This is a query only 

command.

The returned integer is a 3-bit binary encoded word

Bit Weight Definition

0 1 Capture currently in progress

1 2 Capture triggered, either by 

TTL or remote command

2 4 Capture wrapped

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
138 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

If capture is started with hardware trigger On, then all 3 bits remain 0 until the trigger is 

received. Once capture is started, bits 0 and 1 both become 1 (giving a return value of 3). 

Bit 0 remains 1 while capture is recording data. After receiving the CAPTURESTOP

command, bit 0 may remain 1 until the current 2kbyte block of data is filled.

If the capture buffer wraps around, then bit 2 becomes 1; this occurs at the end of a 

OneShot capture, or when a Continuous capture begins overwriting old data.

Bits 1 and 2, once set, will remain set until cleared by resetting the capture system with a 

CAPTURECFG or CAPTURELEN command.

Example

CAPTURESTAT? Returns the capture buffer state

CAPTUREPROG?

The CAPTUREPROG? query returns the number of kilobytes of data that were written 

during the most recent capture acquisition. Capture must be stopped before performing 

this query.

If the acquisition wrapped during operating in Continuous mode, CAPTUREPROG? will 

simply return the value of CAPTURELEN.

Example

CAPTUREPROG? Returns the amount of data captured, in kilobytes

CAPTUREVAL? [ n ]

The CAPTUREVAL? query returns data from the capture buffer in plain text (ASCII) 

format. Data is returned as comma-separated values of one, two, or four floating point 

numbers based on the value of CAPTURECFG. Query with n=0 returns the oldest data 

from the buffer.

Example

CAPTUREVAL? 3 returns the data from position 3

CAPTUREGET? [ i ], [ j ]

The CAPTUREGET? query returns all or part of the capture buffer contents as a binary 

block. The binary block returns j kbytes of capture buffer contents beginning with an 

offset of i kbytes. If (i+j) is longer than CAPTURELEN, then CAPTUREGET returns 

wrapped data.

The maximum length j is 64 (corresponding to 64 kbytes). Both parameters i and j must 

be provided. Capture must be stopped when executing CAPTUREGET? or a range error 

is generated.

The binary block query response is in the following format:

#nccccxxxxxxx

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 139

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Where “#” is the hash character (character code 35), “n” is a single digit specifying the 

number of digits to follow in the block length count; “cccc” is the n–digit integer size of 

the binary block to follow, and “xxxxxxx” is the cccc–byte binary data. Data is packed 

as 4-byte (32-bit) single precision floating point binary, in little endian format.

Example

CAPTUREGET? 0,32 returns a binary block with 32 kbytes of capture data

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
140 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Data Streaming Commands

Overview

See Appendix D for more detailed information about data streaming.

Data Streaming

The SR865 can stream data points continuously in real time over its ethernet interface.

This stream can be X values, (XY) or (Rθ) values, or (XYRθ) values. Streaming more 

values uses more ethernet bandwidth. Data points are streamed as either floating point 

values (4 bytes per data point) or integers (2 bytes per data point). Floating point 

streaming uses twice the bandwidth.

Data is sent over the ethernet interface in UDP packets containing 132, 260, 516 or 1028

payload bytes. Missed packets are NOT resent. It is important that the receiving computer 

be able to keep up with the data rate to prevent data loss and interruption.

Streaming Rate

The streaming rate sets how often data points are sampled and added to the stream. All 

parameters are sampled at the same rate (and at the same times).The maximum allowed 

streaming rate is determined by the time constant of the SR865. Shorter time constants 

allow faster streaming rates, up to a limit of 1.25 MHz. The actual streaming rate can be 

set to the maximum allowed rate divided by factors of 2.

Starting and Stopping

The STREAM ON/OFF command turns streaming on and off. NOTE: Changes to 

streaming parameters only take effect when streaming is turned back on. So if you want 

to change e.g. the kind data being streamed, you need to turn streaming off, change the 

data that is sent, and then turn streaming back on.

Aliasing Effects

In any sampled data stream, it is possible to sample a high frequency signal such that it 

will appear to be a much lower frequency. This is called aliasing.

Aliasing occurs whenever the signal being sampled contains signals at frequencies 

greater than 1/2 the sample rate. The effect is most noticeable when trying to sample an 

output frequency at an integer multiple of the sample rate. 

Generally, choose a streaming rate higher than the time constant bandwidth. The lock-in 

time constant and filter slope should be chosen to attenuate outputs at frequencies higher 

than 1/2 the streaming rate as much as possible.

STREAMCH(?) { X | XY | RT | XYRT | i }

The STREAMCH i command configures the data streaming to X (i=0), X and Y (i=1), R 

and θ (i=2) or X, Y, R and θ (i=3).

Example

STREAMCH 2 Capture R and θ

STREAMCH RT

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 141

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

STREAMCH? Returns the stream configuration i

STREAMRATEMAX?

The STREAMRATEMAX? query returns the maximum allowed streaming rate (at the 

current time constant and sync filter period) in Hz. This is a query only command.

The streaming rate sets how often data points are streamed to the ethernet interface. All 

streamed parameters are sampled at the same rate (and at the same times).The maximum 

streaming rate is determined by the time constant of the SR865. Shorter time constants 

allow faster streaming rates, and if sync filter is on, shorter sync filter periods allow faster 

streaming rates, up to a limit of 1.25 MHz. The actual streaming rate can be set to the 

maximum allowed rate divided by factors of 2.

Example

STREAMRATEMAX? Returns the maximum streaming rate in Hz

STREAMRATE(?) { n }

The STREAMRATE n command sets the streaming rate to the maximum rate divided by 

2n

. The value of n is limited to 0 ≤ n ≤ 20. Set n=0 for the maximum streaming rate.

For example, if STREAMRATEMAX? returns 78125, then STREAMRATE 4 will set the 

streaming rate to (78125)/(24

) = 4882.8125 Hz.

The STREAMRATE? query returns the value n.

Example

STREAMRATE 4 Sets the streaming rate to the max rate divided by 24

STREAMRATE? Returns the streaming rate n

STREAMFMT(?) { i }

The STREAMFMT i command sets the stream data format to float32 (i=0) or int16 (i=1).

Float32 requires 4 bytes per data point and int16 requires 2 bytes per point. Float32 will 

use twice the ethernet bandwidth at the same streaming rate as int16.

Int16 values range from −32768 to +32767 where the sensitivity (divided by the expand) 

is the value 31000.

Example

STREAMFMT 0 Sets the streaming format to float32 (4 bytes per point)

STREAMFMT? Returns the streaming format i

STREAMPCKT(?) { i }

The STREAMPCKT i command sets the ethernet stream packet size to 1024 (i=0), 512 

(i=1), 256 (i=2) or 128 (i=3) bytes.

Example

STREAMPCKT 0 Sets the ethernet streaming packet size to 1024 bytes

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
142 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

STREAMPCKT? Returns the streaming packet size i

STREAMPORT(?) { i }

The STREAMPORT i command sets the ethernet streaming to stream to port i, where i is 

between 1024 and 65535 inclusive. The port should be free and not used by another 

application on the receiving computer. By default, the port is 1865.

Example

STREAMPORT 12345 Sets the ethernet streaming port to port 12345

STREAMPORT? Returns the streaming port i

STREAMOPTION(?) { i }

The STREAMOPTION i command sets certain advanced features of ethernet streaming. 

Setting bit 0 true sends data in little-endian format, while setting bit 0 false sends data in 

big-endian format. Setting bit 1 true enables data integrity checking, while setting bit 1 

false disables data integrity checking. By default, data is sent in big-endian format with 

integrity checking (i=2).

Bit Weight Definition

0 1 Use little-endian

1 2 Use data integrity checking

Example

STREAMOPTION 1 Send data in little-endian format, with no integrity checking

STREAMOPTION 3 Send data in little-endian format, with integrity checking

STREAM(?) { OFF | ON | i }

The STREAM i command turns ethernet data streaming off (i=0) or on (i=1). ). To enable 

streaming, the command must be sent over VXI-11 from the receiving computer. This 

determines the IP address that the data is sent to.

Example

STREAM 1 Turn ethernet streaming on

STREAM ON

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 143

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

System Commands

TIME(?) [ SEConds | MINutes | HOUrs | j ] { , i }

The TIME j, i command sets the clock value for seconds (j=0), minutes (j=1) or hours 

(j=2) to i.

Example

TIME MIN, 30 Set the system clock minutes to 30

TIME 1, 30

TIME? MIN Returns the system clock minutes

DATE(?) [ DAY | MONth | YEAr | j ] { , i }

The DATE j, i command sets the clock value for day (j=0), month (j=1) or year (j=2) to i. 

The value of i is limited to 0–99.

Example

DATE YEAR, 21 Set system clock year to (20)21

DATE 2, 21

DATE? YEAR Returns the system clock year (last 2 digits)

TBMODE(?) { AUTO | INternal | i }

The TBMODE i command sets the external 10 MHz timebase mode to auto (i=0) or 

internal (i=1).

Example

TBMODE AUTO Set the timebase mode to auto

TBMODE 0

TBMODE? Returns the timebase mode i

TBSTAT?

The TBSTAT? query returns the current 10 MHz timebase source, either external (0) or 

internal (1).

Example

TBSTAT? Returns the current 10 MHz timebase

BLAZEX(?) { BLazex | BIsync | UNIsync | i }

The BLAZEX i command sets the rear panel BlazeX output to blazex (i=0), bipolar sync 

(i=1) or unipolar (positive) sync (1=2).

Example

BLAZEX UNI Set the BlazeX output to unipolar sync

BLAZEX 2

BLAZEX? Returns the BlazeX output selection i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
144 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

KEYC(?) { ON | MUte| i }

The KEYC i command turns sounds on (i=0) or off/mute (i=1). This is primarily the key 

and knob clicks but also includes various system sounds.

Example

KEYC MUTE Turn system sounds off

KEYC 1

KEYC? Returns the system sounds state i

PRMD(?) { SCReen | PRNt | MONOchrome | i }

The PRMD i command sets the screen shot mode to screen (i=0), print (i=1) or 

monochrome (i=2). 

Example

PRMD SCR Set the screen shot mode to screen

PRMD 0

PRMD? Returns the screen shot mode i

SDFM(?) { CSV | MATfile | i }

The SDFM i command sets the data file format to csv (i=0) or Matlab (i=1). 

Example

SDFM CSV Set the data file format to csv

SDFM 0

SDFM? Returns the data file format i

FBAS(?) { s }

The FBAS s command sets the file name prefix to the string s. The string s must be 

within quotes (" "). All letters will be converted to upper case. The string s is limited to 7 

characters and may only contain characters which are allowed in DOS file names.

Example

FBAS "F65" Set the file name prefix to “F65”

FBAS "f65"

FBAS? Returns the file name prefix

FNUM(?) { i }

The FNUM i command sets the file name suffix to value i. If the value of i would make 

the filename exceed 8 characters, the suffix will be set to 0. For example, if the file name 

prefix is “SR865_” (6 characters) then FNUM i can set the suffix to 0–99 (limited to 2 

characters).

Example

FNUM 12 Set the file name suffix to 12

FNUM? Returns the file name suffix

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 145

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

FNXT?

The FNXT? command queries the next file name. 

Example

FNXT? Returns the next file name

DCAP

The DCAP command is the same as pressing the [Screen Shot] key. The file save will 

take some time to complete. A USB memory stick must already be in the front panel 

USB port.

SVDT

The SVDT command is the same as pressing the [Data Save] key. The file save will take 

some time to complete. A USB memory stick must already be in the front panel USB 

port.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
146 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Interface Commands

*RST

The *RST command resets the SR865 to its default configurations. The communications 

setup is not changed. All other modes and settings are set to their default conditions and 

values. This command takes some time to complete. This command resets any data scan 

in progress. Data stored in the buffers will be lost. See page 64 for a complete list of 

setting values that result from *RST.

*IDN?

The *IDN? query returns the SR865's device identification string. This string is in the 

format 

Stanford_Research_Systems,SR865,000111,v1.23

In this example, the serial number is 000111 and the firmware version is 1.23.

*TST?

The *TST? query always returns “0”.

*OPC(?)

The *OPC command sets the Operation Complete bit within the Standard Event Status 

register (see page 152). 

Querying *OPC? Always returns a “1”, but does not affect the Standard Event Status 

register.

LOCL(?) { i }

The LOCL command sets the local/remote function. If i=0 the SR865 is set to LOCAL, if 

i=1 the SR865 will go REMOTE, and if i=2 the SR865 will go into LOCAL LOCKOUT. 

The states duplicate the GPIB local/remote states.

In the LOCAL state both command execution and keyboard input are allowed.

In the REMOTE state command execution is allowed but the keyboard and knob are 

locked out except for the [LOCAL] key which returns the SR865 to the LOCAL state.

In the LOCAL LOCKOUT state all front panel operation is locked out, including the 

[LOCAL] key.

The REMOTE indicator is directly above the [LOCAL] key and is on when the unit is in 

REMOTE or LOCAL LOCKOUT.

The Overide Remote mode must be set to Off in order for the front panel to be locked 

out. If Overide Remote is On, then the front panel is active even in the REMOTE state.

Example

LOCL 1 Set the unit to REMOTE

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 147

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

LOCL? Returns the local/remote state i

OVRM (?) { OFF | ON | i }

The OVRM command sets the GPIB Overide Remote to Off (i=0) or On (i=1). When 

Overide Remote is On, then the front panel is NOT locked out when the unit is in the 

REMOTE state. The REMOTE indicator will still be on and the [LOCAL] key will still 

return the unit to the Local state.

The default mode is Overide Remote On. To lock-out the front panel, use the OVRM 0

command before local lock-out.

Example

OVRM 0 Set Overide Remote to No

OVRM? Returns the Overide Remote state i

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
148 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Status Reporting Commands

*CLS

The *CLS command clears all status registers. The status enable registers are NOT 

cleared.

*ESE(?) { j, } { i }

The *ESE i command sets the standard event enable register to the decimal value i

(0–255). The *ESE j, i command sets bit j (0–7) to i (0 or 1). The *ESE? command 

queries the value (0–255) of the standard event enable register. The *ESE? j command 

queries the value (0 or 1) of bit j.

Example

*ESE 17 Set bits 0 and 4 in the standard event enable register

*ESE 4, 1 Set bit 4 in the standard event enable register

*ESE? Returns decimal value of the standard event enable register

*ESE? 4 Returns bit 4 of the standard event enable register

*ESR? { j }

The *ESR? command queries the value of the standard event status byte. The value 

is returned as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The *ESR? j command queries the value 

(0 or 1) of bit j (0–7). Reading the entire byte will clear it while reading bit j will clear 

just bit j.

Example

*ESR? Returns decimal value of the standard event status byte

*ESR? 4 Returns bit 4 of the standard event status byte

*SRE(?) { j, } { i }

The *SRE i command sets the serial poll enable register to the decimal value i (0–

255). The *SRE j, i command sets bit j (0–7) to i (0 or 1). The *SRE? command queries 

the value (0–255) of the serial poll enable register. The *SRE? j command queries the 

value (0 or 1) of bit j.

Example

*SRE 12 Set bits 0 and 3 in the serial poll enable register

*SRE 3, 1 Set bit 3 in the serial poll enable register

*SRE? Returns decimal value of the serial poll enable register

*SRE? 3 Returns bit 3 of the serial poll enable register

*STB? { j }

The *STB? command queries the value of the serial poll status byte. The value is 

returned as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The *STB? j command queries the value 

(0 or 1) of bit j (0–7). Reading this byte has no effect on its value.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 149

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Example

*STB? Returns the decimal value of the serial poll status byte

*STB? 3 Returns bit 3 of the standard event status byte

*PSC(?) { i }

The *PSC i command sets the value of the power-on status clear bit. If i=1 the 

power-on status clear bit is set and all status registers and enable registers are cleared on 

power up. If i=0 the bit is cleared and the status enable registers maintain their values at 

power down. This allows a service request to be generated at power up. *PSC? queries 

the value of the power-on status clear bit.

Example

*PSC 1 Set the power-on status clear bit

*PSC? Returns power-on status clear bit

ERRE(?) { j, } { i }

The ERRE i command sets the error status enable register to the decimal value i (0–

255). The ERRE j, i command sets bit j (0–7) to i (0 or 1). The ERRE? command queries 

the value (0–255) of the error status enable register. The ERRE? j command queries the 

value (0 or 1) of bit j.

Example

ERRE 48 Set bits 4 and 5 in the error status enable register

ERRE 4, 1 Set bit 4 in the error status enable register

ERRE? Returns decimal value of the error status enable register

ERRE? 4 Returns bit 4 of the error status enable register

ERRS? { j }

The ERRS? command queries the value of the error status byte. The value is returned 

as a decimal number from 0 to 255. The ERRS? j command queries the value (0 or 1) of 

bit j (0–7). Reading the entire byte will clear it while reading bit j will clear just bit j.

Example

ERRS? Returns decimal value of the error status byte

ERRS? 4 Returns bit 4 of the error status byte

LIAE(?) { j, } { i }

The LIAE i command sets the lock-in (LIA) status enable register to the decimal 

value i (0–4095). The LIAE j, i command sets bit j (0–11) to i (0 or 1). The LIAE?

command queries the value of the LIA status enable register. The LIAE? j command 

queries the value (0 or 1) of bit j.

Example

LIAE 257 Set bits 1 and 8 in the lock-in status enable register

LIAE 8, 1 Set bit 8 in the lock-in status enable register

LIAE? Returns decimal value of the lock-in status enable register

LIAE? 8 Returns bit 8 of the lock-in status enable register

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
150 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

LIAS? { j }

The LIAS? command queries the value of the lock-in (LIA) status word. The value is 

returned as a decimal number from 0 to 4095. The LIAS? j command queries the value 

(0 or 1) of bit j (0–11). Reading the entire word will clear it while reading bit j will clear

just bit j.

Example

LIAS? Returns decimal value of the lock-in status word

LIAS? 8 Returns bit 8 of the lock-in status byte

CUROVLDSTAT?

The CUROVLDSTAT? command queries the present overload states of the lock-in. These 

overloads reflect the state of the lock-in at the time the command is processed. They are 

NOT set until read.

The value is returned is a decimal number from 0 to 4095 where the bits are defined 

below.

Bit Weight Definition

0 1 CH1 output scale

1 2 CH2 output scale

2 4 unused

3 8 External reference unlocked

4 16 Input range

5 32 unused

6 64 unused

7 128 unused

8 256 Data Channel 1 scale

9 512 Data Channel 2 scale

10 1024 Data Channel 3 scale

11 2048 Data Channel 4 scale

Example

CUROVLDSTAT? Returns decimal value of the overload status word

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 151

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Status Byte Definitions

The SR865 reports on its status by means of four status bytes: the Serial Poll Status byte, 

the Standard Event Status byte, the LIA Status byte, and the Error Status byte.

The status bits are set to 1 when the event or state described in the tables below has 

occurred or is present.

Serial Poll Status Byte

bit name

0 unused

usage

1 unused

2 ERR An enabled bit in the error status byte has been set.

3 LIA An enabled bit in the LIA status byte has been set.

4 MAV The interface output buffer is non-empty.

5 ESB An enabled bit in the standard status byte has been set.

6 SRQ SRQ (service request) has occurred.

7 unused

The ERR, LIA, and ESB bits are set whenever any bit in BOTH their respective status 

bytes AND enable registers is set. Use the *SRE, *ESE, ERRE and LIAE commands to 

set enable register bits. The ERR, LIA and ESB bits are not cleared until ALL enabled 

status bits in the Error, LIA and Standard Event status bytes are cleared (by reading the 

status bytes, using *CLS or by clearing the enable register bits). 

Using *STB? command to read the Serial Poll Status Byte

A bit in the Serial Poll status byte is NOT cleared by reading the status byte using *STB?. 

The bit stays set as long as the status condition exists. This is true even for SRQ. SRQ 

will be set whenever the same bit in the serial poll status byte AND enable register is set. 

This is independent of whether a serial poll has occurred to clear the service request.

Using GPIB Serial Poll

Except for SRQ, a bit in the Serial Poll status byte is NOT cleared by GPIB serial polling 

the status byte. When reading the status byte using a GPIB serial poll, the SRQ bit signals 

that the SR865 is requesting service. The SRQ bit will be set (1) the first time the SR865

is polled following a service request. The GPIB serial poll automatically clears the 

service request SRQ. Subsequent GPIB serial polls will return SRQ cleared (0) until 

another service request occurs. 

Polling the status byte and reading it with *STB? can return different values for SRQ. 

When polled, SRQ indicates a service request has occurred. When read, SRQ indicates 

that an enabled status bit is set.

GPIB Service Requests (SRQ)

A GPIB service request (SRQ) will be generated whenever a bit in both the Serial Poll 

Status byte AND Serial Poll Enable register is set. Use *SRE to set bits in the Serial Poll 

Enable register. A service request is only generated when an enabled Serial Poll Status bit 

becomes set (changes from 0 to 1). An enabled status bit which becomes set and remains 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
152 Programming Chapter 4

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

set will generate a single SRQ. If another service request from the same status bit is 

desired, the requesting status bit must first be cleared. In the case of the ERR, LIA and 

ESB bits, this means clearing the enabled bits in the ERR, LIA and ESB status bytes (by 

reading them). Multiple enabled bits in these status bytes will generate a single SRQ. 

Another SRQ (from ERR, LIA or ESB) can only be generated after clearing the ERR, 

LIA or ESB bits in the Serial Poll status byte. To clear these bits, ALL enabled bits in the 

ERR, LIA or ESB status bytes must be cleared.

The controller should respond to the SRQ by performing a serial poll to read the Serial 

Poll status byte to determine the requesting status bit. Bit 6 (SRQ) will be reset by the 

serial poll.

For example, to generate a service request when a reference UNLK occurs, bit 3 in the 

LIA Status Enable register needs to be set (LIAE 3,1 command) and bit 3 in the Serial 

Poll Enable register must be set (*SRE 3,1 command). When a reference unlock occurs, 

bit 3 in the LIA Status byte is set. Since bit 3 in the LIA Status byte AND Enable register 

is set, this ALSO sets bit 3 (LIA) in the Serial Poll Status byte. Since bit 3 in the Serial 

Poll Status byte AND Enable register is set, an SRQ is generated. Bit 6 (SRQ) in the 

Serial Poll Status byte is set. Further reference unlocks will not generate another SRQ 

until the UNLK status bit is cleared. The UNLK status bit is cleared by reading the LIA 

Status byte (with LIAS?). Presumably, the controller is alerted to the unlock via the SRQ, 

performs a serial poll to clear the SRQ, does something to try to remedy the situation 

(change frequency, experimental parameters, etc.) and then clears the UNLK status bit by 

reading the LIA status register. A subsequent UNLK overload will then generate another 

SRQ.

Standard Event Status Byte

bit name

0 OPC Operation complete (set by the *OPC command)

usage

1 INP Input queue overflow (too many commands received at once, queues 

cleared).

2 unused

3 QRY Output queue overflow (too many responses waiting to be 

transmitted, queues cleared).

4 EXE A command cannot execute correctly or a parameter is out of range.

5 CMD An illegal command is received.

6 URQ Set by any user front panel action.

7 PON Set by power-on.

The bits in this register remain set until cleared by reading them or by the *CLS

command.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Chapter 4 Programming 153

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Lia Status Word

bit name

0 CH1OV CH1 output scale overload

usage

1 CH2OV CH2 output scale overload

2 unused

3 UNLK External reference or Chop unlock detected.

4 RANGE Input range overload detected

5 SYNCF Sync filter frequency out of range

6 SYNCOV Sync filter overload

7 TRIG Set when data storage is triggered

8 DAT1OV Data Channel 1 scale overload

9 DAT2OV Data Channel 2 scale overload

10 DAT3OV Data Channel 3 scale overload

11 DAT4OV Data Channel 4 scale overload

12 DCAPFIN Display capture to USB stick completed

13 SCNST Scan started

14 SCNFIN Scan completed

The LIA Status bits stay set until cleared by reading or by the *CLS command.

Error Status Byte

bit name

0 CLK External 10 MHz clock input error.

usage

1 BACKUP Battery backup failed.

2 unused

3 unused

4 VXI VXI-11 error.

5 GPIB GPIB fast data transfer mode aborted. 

6 USBDEV USB device error (interface error).

7 USBHOST USB host error (memory stick error).

The Error Status bits stay set until cleared by reading or by the *CLS command.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Advanced Filters 155

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix A 

Advanced Filters

Traditionally, analog lock-in amplifier time-constant filters were cascaded single-pole RC 

sections. These are easy to construct, require minimal tuning, and have familiar time and 

frequency domain characteristics. But with the advent of digital lock-in amplifiers, 

anything is possible as far as filters are concerned. So let us consider what is possible, 

what is optimal, and what a lock-in user would want in digital filter.

Different filters have different time domain characteristics, such as rise time and 

overshoot, and different frequency domain characteristics, such as noise bandwidth and 

attenuation slope. These characteristics are inextricably linked. It is impossible to 

arbitrarily specify both the frequency response of the filter and its time domain response. 

That is why when we impose frequency domain restrictions such as “brick-wall” type 

attenuation characteristics they come back to haunt us in the form of poor time domain 

behavior, such as large overshoot.

Lock-in outputs are fundamentally time-domain outputs and this limits how aggressively 

we can specify the frequency domain characteristics of our time constant filters. 

Nevertheless, there are filters other than simple RC filters which offer quantifiable 

benefits to lock-in users.

What are these benefits? For two filters with the same noise bandwidth, i.e. whose 

outputs would be equally noisy if the input was white noise, a lock-in user would always 

prefer a filter with a faster transient response and minimal overshoot. And a lock-in user 

would always prefer a filter with higher stop band attenuation to ensure greater 

suppression of out-of-band spurs. These are the characteristics we will concentrate on. 

To use the advanced filters in place of the RC filters press and hold the [Slope/adv] key 

until the Advanced LED turns on. Brief presses of [Slope/adv] cycles the number of 

poles from 1 to 4 (6 to 24 dB). Another press and hold of the [Slope/adv] key reverts the 

filters back to RC filters and turns off the Advanced LED.

Gaussian FIR Filter

When the time constant is 3 s or shorter, an advanced Gaussian FIR filter pole of 

equivalent noise bandwidth (ENBW) is substituted for an RC filter pole. 

The Gaussian filter has a faster settling time than the RC filter, since it lacks the RC 

filter's agonizing “exponential tail”. The one-stage Gaussian filter gets to within 1% of its 

final value twice as fast as the RC filter!

The Gaussian filter has better rejection of high frequencies than the RC filter. The 

Gaussian filter has a constant 11.6 dB more rejection of high frequencies (per stage) than 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
156 Advanced Filters Appendix A

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

the RC filter. Thus, a four-stage Gaussian filter rejects high frequencies 4*11.6 dB = 46

dB better than a four-stage RC filter.

The Gaussian filter has a flatter pass band than the RC filter. The −3dB bandwidth of the 

Gaussian filter is 1.5 times greater than that of the RC filter.

One disadvantage of the Gaussian filter is the increased latency as more stages are added.

When 4 stages of Gaussian filtering are used, there is seemingly no response for several 

time constants before the output quickly rises.

Lock-in users have long complained that traditional RC filters are “slow”, i.e. for a given 

width in the frequency domain they take the longest time to reach a given percentage of 

their final value. Notice that the FIR filter reaches 99% of its final value more than twice 

as fast as the RC filter. The FIR filter also attenuates signals above f3dB much more.

The FIR filter is ideal when the experiment is sweeping a parameter and faster response 

time translates to faster sweeping, better peak definition and peak symmetry.

What’s the drawback? The FIR f3dB is 50% greater than the RC. This means signals near 

dc might not be attenuated as much as the RC filter. 

The SR865 implements multiple poles of FIR filtering by simply adding identical poles 

in succession. Because the Gaussian filter is computationally intensive it is not available 

for time constants longer than 3s.

Linear Phase Filter

For time constants of 10 s through 30000 s, the advanced filter is a Linear Phase IIR filter 

with same attenuation slope as the RC filters of the same time constant and number of 

poles. In other words, the Linear Phase filter’s stop band is aligned with the 

corresponding RC filter.

For 1 pole of filtering, the Linear Phase and RC filter are identical.

For a given stop band attenuation, the 2 pole Linear Phase filter reaches 99% of its final 

value almost twice as fast as the RC filter. There is slight penalty in ENBW and 

overshoot but at these longer time constants, the long wait times of the RC filter can 

make the experiment exceptionally arduous.

In Real Life

In an actual experimental situation, the signal is never simple. If the goal is to read a 

static output value, then longer time constants will achieve that. If the output value is 

changing because of parameter sweeping or a signal turning on and off, then the 

advanced filters can be of great help. In practice it is simple to try these filters, at various 

time constants and number of poles, in comparison with RC filters. They often yield 

better results in less time.

Closed Loop Applications

If the lock-in output X is used in a feedback loop, the filter should always be a single RC 

pole. Advanced filtering may lead to oscillations in the loop.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix A Advanced Filters 157

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The BlazeX output is always an RC filter (1 to 4 poles) regardless of the front panel 

Advanced Filter setting. This is because the BlazeX output is intended for feedback 

applications that require low latency.

Summary of Filter Characteristics

The chart below summarizes the speed of the different filters. (also see Step Response 

graphs on the following pages).

The chart below summarizes the noise bandwidth of the different filters. Note that for a 

single stage, all 3 filters are designed with the same noise bandwidth.

Equivalent Noise Bandwidth (fraction of fc=(2π×time constant)

−1 )

Stages RC Gaussian Linear Phase

1 1.6 1.6 1.6

2 0.79 1.1 0.93

3 0.59 0.94 0.83

4 0.5 0.81 0.78

Time to settle to within 1% of final value (in time constants)

Stages RC Gaussian Linear Phase

1 4.6 2.3 4.6

2 6.6 4.0 4.4

3 8.4 5.6 4.8

4 10.0 7.1 5.4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
158 Advanced Filters Appendix A

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Frequency Response Graphs

These graphs illustrate the frequency response of the different filters at 12 and 24 dB/oct. 

Each stage of the Gaussian filter has the same ENBW as a single stage of the RC filter. 

Each stage of the Linear Phase filter has the same roll-off as a single stage of the RC 

filter.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix A Advanced Filters 159

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Step Response Graphs

These graphs illustrate the step response of the different filters at 12 and 24 dB/oct. The 

advanced filters always settle in less time than the RC filters. Gaussian filters have 

increasing latency with more stages. Linear Phase filters have ≤ 1% overshoot.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
160 Advanced Filters Appendix A

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
The FFT Display 161

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix B 

The FFT Display

The FFT display takes a time varying signal, like you would see on an oscilloscope trace, 

and computes its frequency spectrum. In the SR865, this signal is either the output of the 

input amplifier (Raw ADC) or the output of the PSD (Post Mixer or Post Filter).

Fourier's basic theorem states that any waveform in the time domain can be represented 

by the weighted sum of pure sine waves of all frequencies. If the signal in the time 

domain (as viewed on an oscilloscope) is periodic, then its spectrum is probably 

dominated by a single frequency component. What the FFT does is represent the time 

domain signal by its component frequencies.

Why Look at the Spectrum?

A lock-in amplifier measures a single frequency component of the input signal at fref. 

With time constant filtering, all other frequencies are ignored and filtered away. 

Sometimes it can be useful to see what’s going on at other frequencies, even if only with 

a broad overview. This can help identify sources of interference or noise. Other times it 

may be useful for estimating the signal at other frequencies without making multiple 

measurements, each at different reference frequencies and time constants. Take harmonic 

distortion. Instead of making separate measurements at fref, 2×fref, 3×fref, etc. the FFT can 

display the harmonic frequencies and amplitudes with amazing clarity in a single 

measurement. Another example is noise analysis. In an FFT, the noise as a function of 

frequency is displayed.

The FFT Analyzer

The lock-in amplifier digitizes the input signal and multiplies by fref in a phase sensitive 

detector yielding a very narrow band measurement at fref. 

An FFT analyzer works in an entirely different way. A time record of samples (1024 

samples in the SR865) is mathematically transformed into a frequency spectrum using an 

algorithm known as the Fast Fourier Transform or FFT. The FFT is simply a clever set of 

operations which implements Fourier's basic theorem. The resulting spectrum shows the 

frequency components of the input signal.

Now here's the interesting part. The original digital time record comes from discrete 

samples taken at the sampling rate. The corresponding FFT yields a spectrum with 

discrete frequency samples. In fact, the spectrum has half as many frequency points as 

there are time points. (Remember Nyquist's theorem). Suppose that you take 1024 

samples at 256 kHz. It takes 4 ms to take this time record. The FFT of this record yields 

512 frequency points, but over what frequency range? The highest frequency will be 

determined by the period of 2 time samples or 128 kHz. The lowest frequency is just the 

period of the entire record or 1/(4 ms) or 250 Hz. Everything below 250 Hz is considered 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
162 The FFT Display Appendix B

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

to be dc. The output spectrum thus represents the frequency range from dc to 128 kHz

with points every 250 Hz.

Advantages and limitations

The advantage of this technique is its speed. The entire spectrum takes only 4 ms to 

measure. The limitation of this measurement is its resolution. Because the time record is 

only 4 ms long, the frequency resolution is only 250 Hz. Suppose the signal has a 

frequency component at 260 Hz. The FFT spectrum will detect this signal but place part 

of it in the 250 Hz point and part in the 500 Hz point. In fact, the way to measure the 

signal accurately is to lengthen the time record and change the resolution of the spectrum.

Of course eventually you end up with a very long measurement of a very narrow 

spectrum — much like a lock-in amplifier. At this point, you lose the FFT advantange 

and should indeed rely on the lock-in measurement.

FFT’s in the SR865

The SR865 FFT display is not a replacement for a full FFT spectrum analyzer instrument. 

It is intended to give the user an overview of the spectrum of the input signal or the 

output of the PSD and time constant filters.

The length of the time record is always 1024 points, the maximum span of an output FFT 

is determined by the time constant, the window is Kaiser and the averaging is rms. The 

amplitude is always dB (Vrms) and is uncalibrated (only accurate to a few dB). None of 

this can be changed.

Important Facts About SR865 FFT’s

1. The acquisition time of a spectrum (averaging off) is equal to the time record. 

Narrow frequency spans means long time records. The time record is about 

500/span (Hz). Changing the measurement in narrow spans means waiting for at least 

a time record for a spectrum.

2. The lock-in time constant determines the maximum span for post filter FFT’s. Using 

a long time constant means having a long FFT time record.

3. The frequency scale is labelled with respect to the signal’s frequency at the input 

BNC. Thus a signal at fref, which appears at dc at the lock-in output, will be labelled 

as fref in the FFT.

4. Amplitudes are uncalibrated. Amplitude measurements are generally accurate to a 

few dB.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix B The FFT Display 163

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Using the FFT Display

This example is designed to use the SR865 internal oscillator and an external signal source to explore 

some the FFT display. You will need a synthesized function generator capable of providing a 100 mVrms 

sine wave at 100.000 kHz, BNC cables and a terminator appropriate for the generator function output. 

You will display the FFT when measuring a signal close to, but not equal to, the internal reference 

frequency. This setup will illustrate the input and output FFT’s. 

Do This Explanation

1. Disconnect all cables from the lock-in. Turn the 

power on while holding down the [Local] key. 

The power switch is on the power entry module 

on the rear panel.

When the power is turned on with [Local]

pressed, the lock-in returns to its standard 

default settings. See the Standard Settings list in 

the Operation section for a complete listing of 

the settings.

2. Turn on the function generator, set the frequency 

to 100.000 kHz (exactly) and the amplitude to 

100 mVrms.

Connect the function output (sine wave) from 

the synthesized function generator to the A input 

using a BNC cable and appropriate terminator.

The input impedance of the lock-in is 10 MΩ. 

The generator may require a terminator. Many 

generators have either a 50Ω or 600Ω output 

impedance. Use the appropriate feedthrough or 

T termination if necessary. In general, not using 

a terminator means that the function output 

amplitude will not agree with the generator 

setting.

The SR865 is set to an internal reference of 

100.000 kHz. This should be very close to the 

external generator frequency. The X (green) 

and Y (blue) displays should read values which 

change slowly. The lock-in and the generator 

are not phase locked but they are at the same 

frequency with a slowly changing θ (orange). 

The signal magnitude R (yellow) is phase 

independent and does not change.

You can adjust the generator frequency slightly 

to get closer to the SR865.

15. Press [Screen Layout] multiple times to change 

the display to the full screen FFT.

The FFT of the signal input is displayed. There 

is only a single quantity shown.

The left and right edge frequencies are labelled 

at the bottom of the graph. The cursor readout is 

at the right.

The display is adjusted with the tiles across the 

bottom. {Src} selects the source data for the 

FFT. {dB} and {Hz} adjust the vertical and 

horizontal scales. {Avgs} sets the amount of 

averages and {Live} toggles to {Paused}.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
164 The FFT Display Appendix B

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Use the <Cursor> knob to move the cursor.

3. Touch the {dB/div} scale tile at the bottom to 

display its scale palette.

Touch to auto scale the FFT.

Touch and drag in the graph area to move the 

graph up and down or use the and 

buttons.

Use the <Cursor> knob to move the marker onto 

the signal peak.

The vertical axis is always logarthmic in the 

FFT display. This allows a large dynamic range 

to be shown in a single graph.

The amplitude is not calibrated.

Touch to change the width of the cursor. In 

the FFT display, the wide cursors always find 

the peak within the cursor region. This makes 

reading an FFT much easier.

Touch the highlighted {dB/div} tile again to 

dismiss the scale palette.

Notice that the cursor readout at the upper right 

reads the peak amplitude and frequency. This is 

the signal from the external generator. The peak 

is about −20 dB or 0.1 Vrms. The cursor reads 

97.6562 kHz. This is because at this full span, 

the FFT frequency bins are 9.76 kHz apart and 

the 100.00 kHz signal falls mostly in the 

97.6562 kHz bin.

3. Touch the {Hz/div} tile along the bottom to 

display the span up/down buttons.

The FFT frequency span can be reduced to 

provide better frequency resolution. When the 

FFT source is Raw ADC, the FFT display is 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix B The FFT Display 165

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Touch 3 times to decrease the frequency 

scale to 39.06 kHz/div.

Move the cursor back to the peak.

always baseband (i.e. the frequency span starts 

at 0 Hz or dc).

The cursor readout now reads 100.098 kHz 

because each frequency bin has been reduced to 

0.6 kHz.

4. Touch the {Avgs} tile along the bottom to 

display the averaging up/down buttons.

Touch twice to increase the number of 

averages to 10.

FFT graphs can be averaged to reduce 

fluctuations. Averaging is exponential in the 

number of averages.

Touch twice to decrease the number of 

averages to 1.

Turn the averaging off to speed up the display.

5. Touch the {Live} tile along the bottom to pause 

the FFT display.

Touch {Paused} to return to a live display.

The FFT may be paused.

Press the [Time Constant Down] key multiple 

times to set the time constant to 1 ms.

When the FFT source is set to the PSD output, 

the maximum frequency span is set by the time 

constant. The shorter the time constant, the 

higher the maximum frequency span. This is 

because the PSD output is frequency limited by 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
166 The FFT Display Appendix B

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

the time constant filters.

6. Touch the {Src} tile along the bottom to display 

the source up/down buttons.

Touch repeatedly to change the source to 

Post Filter.

The FFT of the PSD filtered output is 

displayed. This display is presented as a 

zoomed spectrum (the same as a spectrum 

analyzer). The center of the span is the lock-in 

reference frequency. Signals to the right of 

center are above the fref, signals to the left are 

below fref. The center frequency is the signal at 

fref.

Note that this is not the same as connecting the 

lock-in output BNC to a spectrum analyzer.

7. Touch the {Hz/div} tile along the bottom to 

display the span up/down buttons.

Use the and buttons to set the Hz/div to 

305.2 Hz.The total span is about 1 kHz.

At a 1 ms time constant the maximum span is 

about 50 kHz (4.883 kHz/div). At a 1 s time 

constant, the maximum span is 1.6 kHz 

(152.6 Hz/div).

8. Increase the external generator frequency to 

101.000 kHz. Move the cursor to the peak.

Decrease the external generator frequency to

99.000 kHz.

The signal peak moves to the right of center and 

the cursor reads 101.00 kHz.

The signal peak moves to the left of center and 

the cursor reads 99.00 kHz.

Both of these signal frequencies will appear at 

the lock-in output at 1.00 kHz (|fsig − fref|). Any 

signal at fref appears at the lock-in output at dc.

On the FFT display, these signals are shown at 

their true input frequencies.

9. Leave the external generator at 99.000 kHz. 

Move the cursor to the signal peak.

Note that the peak amplitude is diminished 

from its value at 100.000 kHz. The readout is 

about −36 dB. This is because the lock-in time 

constant acts like a bandpass filter in the 

spectrum centered at fref (center).

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix B The FFT Display 167

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Press the [Filter Slope] key once to increase the 

filter slope to 12 dB/oct.

The peak amplitude at 99.000 kHz is 

diminished even further. This is the effect of the 

steeper time constant filter.

At the lock-in output, the 1 kHz output is 

attenuated further by this filter.

This example has provided a quick overview of 

the FFT display in the SR865.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
168 The FFT Display Appendix B

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Using the Webserver 169

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix C 

Using the Webserver

The SR865 webserver provides a quick start to interfacing via ethernet. Make sure to set 

the IP address, subnet mask and gateway address for your network in the system ethernet 

menu. Be sure to enable the webserver in the VXI-11 & Web settings. Press and hold

[Calc/system] to access the system menu.

To bring up the unit’s webpage, simply type the unit’s IP address into the browser bar of 

a computer which can access the same subnet. Note that typical installations do not allow 

the unit to be seen on the internet, only on the internal subnet. For full internet access, 

consult with your IT administrator.

The homepage is shown below. Various instrument properties are displayed. This is an 

easy way to check the ethernet settings without writing any software.

Click on the Interactive Control tab to display the command screen. Here you can try 

sending commands or queries and checking the responses to SR865 commands. Click on 

the SR865 Command List link to see the commands.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
170 Using the Webserver Appendix C

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Click the Monitor Output tab to display a simple readout of the 4 data channels.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Data Streaming and Capture 171

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix D 

Data Streaming and Capture

Ethernet streaming of lock-in data (X, Y, R, and θ) is implemented using UDP packets. 

The STREAM ON command must be sent via VXI-11 from the computer that will 

receive the streamed data. This is because ethernet streaming sends data to the IP address 

that sent the STREAM ON command.

UDP packets must be received on a “port,” which is a virtual numerical address on the 

receiving computer. Common ports, like 80 for web servers or 22 for ssh, should be 

avoided. By default, port 1865 is used, but that can be changed with the STREAMPORT 

command.

All data in the UDP packet are binary, so the “endianness” of the data matters. In bigendian format, a 32-bit (4-byte) word is stored as B3 B2 B1 B0, where B3 is the mostsignificant byte of the word and B0 is the least significant byte. Little-endian format 

reverses the byte order, so that the same 32-bit (4-byte) word is stored as B0 B1 B2 B3.

Similarly, a 16-bit (2-byte) integer is stored as B1 B0 in big-endian format, while it is B0

B1 in little-endian format. If the streamed data is not in the same endianness as the 

receiving computer, then the byte order of the data must be reversed. Note that the bits 

within each byte are NOT reversed.

Each UDP packet sent consists of a 32-bit (4-byte) header, and 128-1024 bytes of data, as 

shown below. The endianness of the data and packet integrity-checking are controlled by

the STREAMOPTION command. If integrity-checking is enabled, it is handled 

automatically by Ethernet hardware; if an error is detected, then the entire packet is 

dropped. The amount of data sent in each packet is controlled by the STREAMPCKT 

command. You might want to send fewer data bytes per packet if the sample rate is low 

and you want packets to arrive with less latency. Otherwise, larger data sizes are 

recommended as they have less overhead and are more bandwidth-efficient.

Header Data

4 bytes

Big-endian

128-1024 bytes

Big- or little-endian

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
172 Data Streaming and Capture Appendix D

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

The header word consists of the following fields:

Header bits

31–24 (MSB) 23–16 15–12 11–8 7–0 (LSB)

Status

Bit 24: Overload

Bit 25: Error

Bit 28: Little-end

Bit 29:Checksum

Sample rate

0: 1.25 MHz

1: 625 kHz

2: 312.5 kHz

...

N: 1.25MHz/2N,

...

31: 0.582 mHz

Packet length

0: 1024 bytes

1: 512 bytes

2: 256 bytes

3: 128 bytes

Packet content

32 bit floats:

0: X

1: XY

2: Rθ

3: XYRθ

16 bit integers:

4: X

5: XY

6: Rθ

7: XYRθ

Packet counter

0–255

Packet counter: allows the receiving computer to detect lost or dropped packets. Each 

UDP packet has a packet count that is one greater than the previous packet, modulo 256. 

Packet content: indicates the data contained in the packet.

Packet length: the number of bytes of data that follow.

Sample rate: is the sample rate of the data in the packet. A value of N corresponds to a 

sampling rate of 1.25 MHz/(2N

), where N is a value between 0 and 31 inclusive. This 

sample rate already takes into account the subsampling requested in the command 

STREAMRATE.

Status: bit 24 is high when an input overload, sync filter overload (if sync filter is on), or 

output overload (if integer data is contained in the packet) condition existed at the 

beginning of the packet. Bit 25 is high when a PLL unlock or sync filter out-of-range 

condition existed at the beginning of the packet.

Bit 28 is high if data is stored in little-endian format, and low if it is in big-endian format. 

Bit 29 indicates that integrity-checking (UDP packet checksumming) is enabled.

After reading the header information, it is possible to correctly interpret the data in the 

rest of the packet. If you need to do endian-conversion, floating-point data must be 

converted 32 bits (4 bytes) at a time, whereas integer data must be converted 16 bits (2 

bytes) at a time.

XYRθ data is recorded in that order, followed by the next sample of XYRθ. As an 

example, let's say the packet contains floating-point XYRθ data:

Data bytes

Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ...

Data X(0) Y(0) R(0) θ (0) X(1) ...

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix D Data Streaming and Capture 173

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

If the packet contains integer XY data:

Data bytes

Byte 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ...

Data X(0) Y(0) X(1) Y(1) X(2) Y(2) X(3) Y(3) X(4) Y(4) ...

The maximum sample rate is 1.25MHz. If floating-point XYRθ data is streamed, then the 

data rate can exceed 1.25 MHz × 4 channels × 4 bytes = 20 MBytes/s. This data rate 

requires Gigabit ethernet to work. Fast (100Mb/s) ethernet is not sufficient to support the 

maximum data rate. At high data rates, we recommend putting the SR865 and the 

receiving computer on the same dedicated network. This reduces traffic congestion for 

other users, and reduces the chance of dropped packets.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Dual Reference Detection 175

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix E 

Dual Reference Detection

In a typical lock-in experiment the signal of interest is at a known frequency ωsig. The 

lock-in is set up to detect signals at only this frequency by multiplying the input signal by 

sin(ωsigt) (using either internal or external reference mode).

If the signal is

sin( ) sig sig A ω t

then the result of the lock-in multiplication is

[1 cos(2 )] 2 sin( ) sin( ) sig

sig

sig sig sig t

A

A ω t × ω t = − ω

and the time constant low pass filter removes the 2ωsig component leaving a dc result 

proportional to Asig.

In some experiments there is an additional modulation of the signal. This results from the 

mixing of 2 frequencies in the experiment. Often one of the frequencies is much lower 

than the other. Let’s call these frequencies ωcar and ωmod for carrier and modulation and 

assume ωmod << ωcar.

If the carrier signal is

sin( ) car car A ω t ,

then the experiment modulates this by multiplying by the modulation signal resulting in

[cos({ } ) cos({ } )] 2 sin( ) sin( ) car mod car mod

car mod

car car mod mod t t

A A A ω t × A ω t = ω −ω − ω +ω

The experimental signal consists of equal amplitude components at the sum and 

difference frequencies.

Two Lock-in Detection

This signal can be measured using 2 lock-in amplifiers. The signal is input to the first 

lock-in which is set to detect at ωcar. The output of this lock-in will contain sum and 

difference components from both signal components. One of these will be

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
176 Dual Reference Detection Appendix E

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

[ { } ] sin( ) 2

2sin( ) 4 mod

car mod

car mod car

car mod t

A A

t

A A

ω +ω −ω = ω

The time constant is adjusted to remove the high frequency sum components at 2ωcar and 

the analog output of this first lock-in is the signal input to the second lock-in. The second 

lock-in is set to detect at ωmod. The output of this second lock-in is

[1 cos(2 )] 4 sin( ) sin( ) 2 mod

car mod

mod mod

car mod t

A A

t t

A A

ω × ω = − ω

The second lock-in time constant is adjusted to remove the 2ωmod component leaving a dc 

signal proportional to AcarAmod as desired.

SR865 Dual Reference Mode

The SR865 Dual Reference mode makes this measurement in a single lock-in. One of the 

frequencies is the external reference and the other is the internal reference. In Dual 

Reference mode, the SR865 detects at |ωext − ωint|, i.e. the difference frequency. It doesn’t 

matter which is the carrier and which is the modulation. It also doesn’t matter which 

frequency is greater or by how much. The detection frequency is the difference between 

the two frequencies and will always be lower than the greater frequency.

The original experimental signal contains components at the sum and difference 

frequencies

[cos({ } ) cos({ } )] 2 car mod car mod

car mod t t

A A

ω −ω − ω +ω

In Dual Reference mode, the SR865 multiplies by cos({ωcar − ωmod}t) in a single step 

resulting in the output

[1 cos(2{ } ) cos(2 ) cos(2 )] 4 car mod car mod

car mod t t t

A A

+ ω −ω − ω − ω

The SR865 time constant is adjusted to remove all components at 2|ωcar − ωmod|, 2ωcar and 

2ωmod leaving a dc signal proportional to AcarAmod as desired. It should be noted the lockin reports the measured amplitude at (ωcar − ωmod), which is (AcarAmod)/2. Correcting for 

rms, the displayed result will be (AcarAmod)/(2√2).

The Dual Reference mode in the SR865 does not care about the “order” of ωext and ωint. 

The expermental signal could be a fast modulation of a slow carrier or vice versa. The 

SR865 does not require that one of the frequencies be much greater than the other. The 

two frequencies can be very close together. The only requirement is that the time constant 

remove all output components other than dc.

The SR865 does require that one of the frequencies be the internal reference and the other 

the external reference and the difference between them must be less than 2.5 MHz.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Fuse Installation and ac Line Select 177

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix F 

Fuse Installation and ac Line Select

The SR865 operates from 100 V, 120 V, 220 V, or 240 V nominal ac power source 

having a line frequency of 50 or 60 Hz, and accommodates both North American singlefuse or metric dual-fuse operation. This appendix provides detailed instructions for 

modifying the input voltage selection and replacing the line fuse.

Power Entry Module

The line cord receptacle, power switch, fuse holder, and line voltage selector are all part 

of the “power entry module” located on the rear panel of the SR865. Detailed instructions 

for changing the line voltage selection and fuse replacement follow.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
178 Fuse Installation and ac Line Select Appendix F

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

ac Voltage Selector

The SR865 line voltage selection is indicated by the white pin visible at the right hand 

edge of the power entry module. In the image below, the line voltage selection is showing 

120 V. Note that on some units (as pictured below), the 220 V selection can be labeled 

230 V; that position is appropriate for both 220 V and 230 V nominal ac line voltages.

The following steps describe how to change the line voltage selection:

1. Disconnect and remove the power cord.

2. Open the fuse cover (see instructions, below, for fuse installation for detailed 

illustrations).

3. Pull the voltage selector card straight out of the housing, using small needle-nose 

plyers to grip the plastic indicator pin body.

4. Orient the selector card so that the desired line voltage is readable at the bottom

5. Orient indicator pin to point up when desired line voltage is readable at the 

bottom (note that when indicator pin is fixed, successive voltages are selected by 

rotating the card 90° clockwise)

6. Insert the voltage selector card into housing, with the printed side of the card 

facing the fuse and IEC connector. Orient the card so the text showing the 

desired voltage is inserted first.

7. Replace the fuse cover and snap into position, verifying the indicator pin is 

showing at the desired line voltage.

8. If necessary, replace the fuse for the appropriate rating based on line voltage.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix F Fuse Installation and ac Line Select 179

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Fuse Installation

Two options are available for fusing the SR865–North Americal style single fuse, and 

metric dual fuse installation. The fuse holder is reversible to accommodate both styles. 

The following steps describe how to install or replace the fuse(s):

1. Disconnect and remove the power cord.

2. Insert a small screwdriver at the point “X” as shown

3. Gently lift the entire door back, away from the rear panel of the SR865. Lift 

away approximately 0.25" (6 mm). Once lifted, the door will pivot on its hinges 

to expose the fuse holder.

4. When the fuse holder is installed in the single fuse (North American) position, 

apply a screwdriver or small needle nose plyers as shown and gently lift out. Use 

a tool as shown, do not use fingers.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
180 Fuse Installation and ac Line Select Appendix F

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

When the fuse holder is installed in the dual (metric) position, it will normally 

release as soon as the door is opened.

5. Install one (1) AG size 0.25₺ × 1.25₺ fuse or two (2) metric size 5×20 mm fuses 

as shown. Install fuses on one side only—do not install both AG and metric 

together at the same time.

6. Replace fuse holder into housing, fuse first. Be sure to align the circular 

alignment opening on the fuse holder with the orienting pin within the power 

entry module.

7. Swing and push to snap the door back in place.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performance Tests 181

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix G

Performance Tests

Introduction

The performance tests described in this section are designed to verify with a high degree 

of confidence that the unit is performing correctly. 

The results of each test may be recorded on the test sheet at the end of this section.

Serial Number and Firmware Revision

If you need to contact Stanford Research Systems, please have the serial number of your 

unit available. The 6-digit serial number is printed on a label affixed to the rear panel.

Press and hold [Local] and then [Auto Range] at the same time to display the unit serial 

number and version numbers. The [Screen Layout] key exits this screen.

Preset

Throughout this section, it will be necessary to preset the lock-in into a known default 

state. To do this, press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm} to 

reset the SR865 to its default settings. Each test generally starts with a preset. This 

procedure will be referred to as {PRESET}.

Front Panel Test

To test the front panel, press and hold [Local] and then [Auto Range] at the same time.

Turn any knob to run through all of the LEDs. Make sure all of the knobs and all of the

LEDs work.

Touch and drag on the touchscreen to display a little trail. The bright end signifies the lift 

location. This verifies the touch functionality.

Press each key to toggle its position (green/gray) on the screen. Keys with a second press 

and hold function need to be held to toggle. The knobs also have a press and hold feature. 

Check to see that all keys and knobs function.

The [Screen Layout] key exits this screen.

Keys, Knobs and Touch Buttons

These test procedures require the unit to be adjusted from the front panel. The test 

procedures will follow this convention:

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
182 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

[Key] Front panel keys are referred to in [square] brackets. Some keys have a 

second italicized label. Press and hold these keys for 2 seconds to invoke 

the italicized function.

<Knob> Knobs are referred to in <angle> brackets. Knobs are used to adjust 

parameters which have a wide range of values. Some knobs have a push 

button function. Some also have a second italicized label. Press and hold 

these knobs for 2 seconds to invoke the italicized function.

{Touch} Touchscreen buttons and icons are referred to in {curly} brackets. 

Touchscreen buttons are used to adjust the data display as well as change 

certain lock-in parameters.

Warm Up

The lock-in should be turned on and allowed to warm up for at least an hour before any 

tests are performed. It is necessary to turn the unit off and on to preset it. As long as the 

unit is powered on immediately, this will not affect the test results.

Necessary Equipment

The following equipment is necessary to complete the performance tests. The suggested 

equipment or its equivalent should be used.

1. Frequency Synthesizer

Freq Range 1 Hz to 2 MHz

Freq Accuracy better than 5 ppm

Harmonic Distortion ≤ −65 dBc

Spurious ≤ −55 dBc

TTL SYNC available

2. AC Voltmeter

Freq Range 10 Hz to 2 MHz

Input Ranges 10 mV, 100 mV, 1 V

Accuracy 0.5% below 200 kHz, 2% below 2 MHz

Suggested instrument Keysight model 3458A

3. DC Voltmeter

Range 19.999 V, 4 1/2 digits

Accuracy 0.005%

4. Feedthrough Terminations

Impedance 50 Ω, precision to ± 0.1%

Test Record

Make a copy of the SR865 Performance Test Record at the end of this section. Fill in the 

results of the tests on this record. This record will allow you to determine whether the 

tests pass or fail and also to preserve a record of the tests.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 183

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

If A Test Fails

If a test fails, you should check the settings and connections of any external equipment 

and, if possible, verify its operation using a DVM, scope or some other piece of test 

equipment. 

After checking the setup, repeat the test from the beginning to make sure that the test was 

performed correctly.

If the test continues to fail, contact Stanford Research Systems for further instructions. 

Make sure that you have the unit's serial number and firmware revision code handy. Have 

the test record on hand as well.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
184 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

dc Offset

This test measures the dc offset of the signal input.

Setup

Connect a 50Ω terminator to the A input. This shorts the input so the lock-in's own dc offset will be 

measured.

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.00 Hz.

Press [Input Range Down] multiple times

Set the input range to 10 mV.

Press [Sensitivity Down] multiple times

Set the sensitivity to 10 mV.

3) Wait at least 10 seconds, then record the reading of R (yellow).

4) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Press [Couple]

Select DC coupling.

5) Wait 10 seconds, then record the reading of R (yellow).

6) This completes the dc offset test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of this 

section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 185

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Common Mode Rejection

This test measures the common mode rejection of the voltage input. 

Setup

We will use the internal oscillator sine output to provide the signal.

Connect the Sine Out+ to both the A and B inputs of the lock-in. Use equal length cables from A and B to 

a BNC TEE. Connect the cable from the Sine Out+ to the TEE. This test only uses ONE Sine Out BNC. 

Do not use any termination.

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.0 kHz.

Touch {Ampl} to display the sine out amplitude keypad

Enter an amplitude of 1.0 V.

3) The value of R (yellow) should be 1.000 V (within 2%).

4) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Press [Couple]

Select DC coupling.

Press [A−B]

Select A−B.

Press [Sensitivity Down] multiple times

Set the sensitivity to 200 μV.

5) Record the value of R (yellow).

6) This completes the CMRR measurement test. The common mode rejection is 20log(1.0/R) where 

R is in Volts. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
186 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Sine Output Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

This test measures the amplitude accuracy and frequency flatness of the internal oscillator Sine Out. 

These results will also be used next for testing the input Amplitude Accuracy.

Setup

We will use the precision ac multimeter to measure the Sine Out. Connect the Sine Out+ to the ac Volts 

input of the voltmeter using a 1 meter BNC cable, with the precision 50Ω terminator at the voltmeter 

connection . This test only uses ONE Sine Out BNC. This means that each measurement with the ac 

voltmeter will nominally be 50% of the programmed sine amplitude.

Set the multimeter for ac volts. If using the model 3458A, it should be configured as:

i) Reset: press (blue shift key) then Reset

ii) SETACV RNDM: press (blue) “S”, then ⇓ 3 times, then ⇒, then ⇓ 2 times, then Enter

iii) ACV: press ACV

iv-a) for RANGE 1: press (blue) “R”, then “1”, then Enter

iv-b) for RANGE 0.1: press (blue) “R”, then “0.1”, then Enter

iv-c) for RANGE 0.01: press (blue) “R”, then “0.01”, then Enter

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Amplitude accuracy is verified at 1 kHz. Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.0 kHz.

3) For each sine amplitude, use the voltmeter range setting in the table below, perform steps 3a 

through 3b.

1.00 V 1 

Sine Output Amplitude ac voltmeter range

300 mV 1 

100 mV 0.1 

30 mV 0.1

10.0 mV 0.01

1.00 mV 0.01

a) Use the SR865 front panel to make the following adjustments 

Touch {Ampl} to display the sine out amplitude keypad

Enter the amplitude from the table.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 187

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

b) Adjust the voltmeter range (step iv-a, iv-b, or iv-c). Wait for the ac volts reading to stabilize. 

Record the value.

c) Repeat 3a and 3b for each amplitude in the table.

4) Adjust the multimeter range to 100 mVAC (step iv-b)

5) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

Touch {Ampl} to display the sine out amplitude keypad

Enter an amplitude of 100 mV.

6) Frequency response is checked at frequencies above 1 kHz. The sine amplitude is set to 100 mV 

for all frequencies. The test frequencies are listed below.

Test Frequencies

a) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

10 kHz

100 kHz

1.0 MHz

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter the frequency from the table.

b) Wait for the multimeter readings to stabilize. Record the value.

c) Repeat steps 6a and 6b for all frequencies in the table.

7) This completes the sine output amplitude accuracy and frequency response test. Enter the results 

of this test in the test record at the end of this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
188 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

This test measures the amplitude accuracy and frequency response.

Setup

We will use the internal sine output to provide an accurate sine wave for testing the signal input function. 

This test requires the preceding Sine Output Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness test results to verify 

specified performance.

Connect the Sine Out+ to the Voltage A input of the SR865 using a 1 meter BNC cable, with the 

precision 50Ω terminator at the A input BNC. This test only uses ONE Sine Out BNC. This means that 

each measurement will nominally be 50% of the programmed sine amplitude.

Preliminary calculations

i) Refer to the Reading values recorded for the Sine Output Amplitude and Flatness test.

ii) Results labeled (A) through (J) are used to set performance Lower Limits and Upper Limits for 

Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

iii) On the Performance Test Record, for Lower and Upper limits, perform the multiplication 

indicated with the referenced value of Sine Output Amplitude and Flatness. For example:

Assume result (A) is recorded as 0.4966 V

The Lower Limit at 1V will be 0.99×(A)= 0.99×0.4966 V = 0.4916 V

The Upper Limit at 1V will be 1.01×(A)= 1.01×0.4966 V = 0.5016 V

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.0 kHz.

Press Filter [Slope/adv] multiple times

Select 24 dB/oct.

3) Amplitude accuracy is verified at 1 kHz and various sensitivities. For each input range setting in 

the table below, perform steps 3a through 3c.

Sine Out Amplitude Input Range

1.0000 Vrms 1 V 1 V

Sensitivity

300.00 mVrms 300 mV 200 mV

100.000 mVrms 100 mV 100 mV

30.000 mVrms 30 mV 50 mV

10.000 mVrms 10 mV 10 mV

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 189

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

a) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

Touch {Ampl} to display the amplitude keypad

Enter the amplitude from the table

Press [Input Range Down]

Select the input range from the table.

Press [Sensitivity Down]

Select the sensitivity from the table.

b) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R (yellow) for each sensitivity.

4) Frequency response is checked at frequencies above 1 kHz. The test frequencies are listed below. 

1.0 kHz

Test Frequencies

10 kHz

100 kHz

1.0 MHz

a) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

Touch {Ampl} to display the amplitude keypad

Enter the 100 mV

Press [Input Range Up/Down]

Set the input range to 100 mV.

Press [Sensitivity Up/Down]

Set the sensitivity to 100 mV.

b) Set the sine output to the frequency in the table.

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter the frequency from the table.

c) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R (yellow).

d) Repeat steps 4b and 4c for all of the frequencies listed.

5) This completes the amplitude accuracy and frequency response test. Enter the results of this test 

in the test record at the end of this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
190 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Amplitude Linearity

This test measures the amplitude linearity. This tests how accurately the lock-in measures a signal smaller 

than full scale. This test requires the preceding Sine Output Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness test results 

to verify specified performance.

Setup

We will use the internal sine output to provide an accurate sine wave for testing the signal input function. 

This test requires the preceding Sine Output Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness test results to verify 

specified performance.

Connect the Sine Out+ to the Voltage A input of the SR865 using a 1 meter BNC cable, with the 

precision 50Ω terminator at the A input BNC. This test only uses ONE Sine Out BNC. This means that 

each measurement will nominally be 50% of the programmed sine amplitude.

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.0 kHz.

Press Filter [Slope/adv] multiple times

Select 24 dB/oct.

3) For each of the amplitudes listed below, perform steps 3a through 3b.

Sine Out Amplitude

1.0000 Vrms 1 V

Sensitivity

100.000 mVrms 100 mV

10.000 mVrms 10 mV

1.000 mVrms 1 mV

a) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

Touch {Ampl} to display the amplitude keypad

Enter the amplitude from the table

Press [Sensitivity Down]

Select the sensitivity from the table.

b) Wait for the R reading to stabilize. Record the value of R.

4) This completes the amplitude linearity test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the 

end of this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 191

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Frequency Accuracy

This test measures the frequency accuracy of the lock-in. This tests the accuracy of the frequency counter 

inside the unit. The counter is used only in external reference mode. The internal oscillator frequency is 

set by a crystal and has 25 ppm frequency accuracy.

Setup

We will use the frequency synthesizer to provide the reference signal.

Connect the TTL SYNC output of the frequency synthesizer to the Reference input of the lock-in. 

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Set the frequency synthesizer to a frequency of 9.9990 kHz.

3) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Press [Ref/chop]

Select External reference mode.

Press External [Trig]

Select Pos TTL.

Press [Config]

Touch {Data1 Display} to highlight the green data source.

Touch {Fext} to choose external reference frequency for Data1.

Touch {Close}

Press [Screen Layout] multiple times

Set the screen to show 8 big numerical/bar graphs.

4) The lock-in should be locked to the external reference. The frequency is displayed at the top of 

the screen (fext), but is more easily read from the large green Fe display. Record the frequency 

reading.

5) This completes the frequency accuracy test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the 

end of this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
192 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Phase Accuracy

This test measures the phase accuracy of the lock-in. The phase accuracy is determined by measuring the 

phase of the internal oscillator Sine Out.

Setup

Connect the Sine Out+ to the Voltage A input of the SR865 using a 24-inch BNC cable, with the 

precision 50Ω feedthrough terminator at the A input BNC. This test only uses ONE Sine Out BNC.

Please note that the phase calibration is performed at the factory relative to a 24-inch RG-58 BNC cable, 

with approximately 3 ns of propagation delay. Results will be show a significant dependence on cable 

length. For example, using a 2 m long cable instead of the specified 24-inch cable will introduce an 

additional 6.9 ns of propagation delay between sine output and signal input: at 2 MHz, this corresponds to 

5° of additional phase delay.

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.0 kHz.

Touch {Ampl} to display the sine out amplitude keypad

Enter an amplitude of 100 mV.

Press Filter [Slope/adv] multiple times

Select 24 dB/oct.

Press [Time Constant Up] 

Select 300 ms

Press [Input Range Down] 

Select 300 mV

Press [Couple]

Select DC coupling.

3) The value of R (yellow) should be 0.050 V (±2%) and the value of θ (orange) should 0° (±1°).

4) Phase accuracy is checked at various frequencies. The test frequencies are listed below.

Test Frequencies

10 Hz

100 Hz

1 kHz

10 kHz

100 kHz

1.0 MHz

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 193

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

a) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter the frequency from the table.

b) Wait for the readings to stabilize. Record the value of θ (orange).

c) Repeat steps 4a and 4b for all frequencies in the table.

5) This completes the phase accuracy test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of 

this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
194 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

dc Outputs and Inputs

This test measures the dc accuracy of the dc outputs and inputs of the lock-in.

Setup

We will use the digital voltmeter (DVM) to measure the dc outputs of the lock-in. Then we will use one 

of the outputs to generate a voltage to measure on the dc inputs.

Connect a 50Ω termination to the A input.

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

Press [Screen Layout] multiple times if needed

Set the screen to show 8 big numerical/bar graphs.

2) For the CH1 and CH2 outputs, repeat steps 2a through 2e.

a) Connect the CH1 (or CH2) output to the DVM. Set the DVM to a 20 V range.

b) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments 

Press the CH1 (or CH2) Output <Offset> knob

Turn the offset on. Make sure the OFFSET LED is on.

Press and hold the CH1 (or CH2) Output <Offset> knob

Display the X (or Y) offset keypad.

c) For each of the offsets in the table below, repeat steps 2d and 2e.

−100.00

Offsets (%)

−50.00

0.00

50.00

100.00

d) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Turn the CH1 (or CH2) Output <Offset> knob to set the offset to the value in the table.

e) Record the DVM reading.

3) For each Aux Output (1, 2, 3 and 4), repeat steps 3a through 3e.

a) Connect the Aux Output (on the rear panel) to the DVM.

b) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Tests 195

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Press [Aux Output] to display the Aux Output keypad

Touch an {Out} button to display the correct Aux Output in the keypad.

c) For each output voltage in the table below, repeat steps 3d and 3e.

−10.000

Output Voltages

−5.000

0.000

5.000

10.000

d) Use the keypad to enter the Aux Output level from the table.

e) Record the DVM reading.

4) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Press [Aux Output] to display the Aux Output keypad

Touch {Out1} button to display Aux Output 1 in the keypad.

Press [Screen Layout] multiple times

Set the screen to show 8 big numerical/bar graphs.

5) For Aux Inputs (1, 2, 3 and 4), repeat steps 5a through 5e.

a) Connect Aux Out 1 to the correct Aux Input with a BNC cable.

b) For each output voltage in table 3c above, repeat steps 5c and 5d.

c) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Press [Aux Output] to display the Aux Output keypad

Use the keypad to enter the Aux Output 1 level from the table.

Touch {Close} to dismiss the keypad

The screen returns to the 8 big numerical/bar graphs.

d) Record the Aux Input (1, 2, 3 or 4) value.

6) This completes the dc outputs and inputs test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the 

end of this section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
196 Performance Tests Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Input Noise

This test measures the lock-in input noise.

Setup

Connect a 50Ω termination to the A input. This grounds the input so the lock-in's own noise is measured.

Procedure

1) {PRESET} (press [Save Recall], then touch {Recall default}. Touch {Confirm})

2) Use the front panel to make the following adjustments

Touch {Fint} to display the internal frequency keypad

Enter a frequency of 1.0 kHz.

Press [Input Range Down] multiple times

Set the input range to 10 mV.

Press [Sensitivity Down] multiple times

Set the sensitivity to 100 nV.

Press Filter [Slope/adv] 

Select 12 dB/oct.

Press [Couple]

Select DC coupling.

Press [Config] to display the data configuration screen

Touch {Data1 Display} to highlight the green data source.

Touch {Xnoise} to choose Xnoise for Data1.

Touch {Close}

3) Wait at least 1 minute for the reading of Xnoise (green) to stabilize. Record the value of Xnoise.

4) This completes the noise test. Enter the results of this test in the test record at the end of this 

section.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Performance Test Record 197

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

SR865 Performance Test Record

Serial Number _____________________ Tested By __________________________

Firmware Revision _________________ Date ______________________________

Equipment Used __________________________________________________

__________________________________________________

__________________________________________________

__________________________________________________

__________________________________________________

dc Offset

Input Coupling Reading

AC _______ 0.500 mV

Upper Limit

DC _______ 0.500 mV

Common Mode Rejection

Frequency Reading

1 kHz _______ 30 μV

Upper Limit

Sine Output Amplitude and Flatness

Sine Output Ampl. Lower Limit Reading

1.00 V 0.490 V (A)_______ 0.5100 V

Upper Limit

300 mV 147.0 mV (B)_______ 153.0 mV

100 mV 49.0 mV (C)_______ 51.0 mV

30 mV 14.70 mV (D)_______ 15.30 mV

10.0 mV 4.98 mV (E)_______ 5.10 mV

1.00 mV 0.490 mV (F)_______ 0.510 mV

Sine Ampl. Frequency Lower Limit Reading

100 mV 10 kHz 49.0 mV (G)_______ 51.0 mV

Upper Limit

100 kHz 49.0 mV (H)_______ 51.0 mV

1.0 MHz 49.0 mV (J)_______ 51.0 mV

Note the readings recorded as (A) through (J) will be used to determine lower and upper limits for the 

Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness, and Amplitude Linearity, both of which are on the next page.

Test Record sheet 1 of 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
198 Performance Test Record Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Amplitude Accuracy and Flatness

Input Range Calibrator Ampl. Lower Limit Reading

1 V 1.0000 Vrms 0.99×(A):______ _______ 1.01×(A):______

Upper Limit

300 mV 300.00 mVrms 0.99×(B):______ _______ 1.01×(B):______

100 mV 100.000 mVrms 0.99×(C):______ _______ 1.01×(C):______

30 mV 30.000 mVrms 0.99×(D):______ _______ 1.01×(D):______

10 mV 10.000 mVrms 0.99×(E):______ _______ 1.01×(E):______

Input Range Frequency Lower Limit Reading

100 mV 1.0 kHz 0.99×(C):______ _______ 1.01×(C):______

Upper Limit

100 mV 10 kHz 0.99×(G):______ _______ 1.01×(F):______

100 mV 100 kHz 0.99×(H):______ _______ 1.01×(G):______

100 mV 1.0 MHz 0.98×(J):______ _______ 1.02×(H):______

Amplitude Linearity

Input Range Calibrator Ampl. Lower Limit Reading

1 V 1.0000 Vrms 0.99×(A):______ _______ 1.01×(A):______

Upper Limit

100.00 mVrms 0.99×(C):______ _______ 1.01×(C):______

10.000 mVrms 0.99×(E):______ _______ 1.01×(E):______

1.0000 mVrms 0.99×(F):______ _______ 1.01×(F):______

Frequency Accuracy

Input Frequency Lower Limit Reading

9.9990 kHz 9.9987 kHz _______ 9.9992 kHz

Upper Limit

Phase Accuracy

Frequency Lower Limit Reading

10 Hz −1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg

Upper Limit

100 Hz −1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg

1 kHz −1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg

10 kHz −1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg

100 kHz −1.0 deg _______ +1.0 deg

1.0 MHz −2.5 deg _______ +2.5 deg

dc Outputs and Inputs

Output Offset% Lower Limit Reading

CH1 −100.00 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Upper Limit

−50.00 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

0.00 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

50.00 −5.05 V _______ −4.95 V

100.00 −10.10 V _______ −9.90 V

Test Record sheet 2 of 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix G Performance Test Record 199

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Output Offset% Lower Limit Reading

CH2 −100.00 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Upper Limit

−50.00 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

0.00 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

50.00 −5.05 V _______ −4.95 V

100.00 −10.10 V _______ −9.90 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX OUT 1 −10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 −5.05 V _______ −4.95 V

10.000 −10.10 V _______ −9.90 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX OUT 2 −10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 −5.05 V _______ −4.95 V

10.000 −10.10 V _______ −9.90 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX OUT 3 −10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 −5.05 V _______ −4.95 V

10.000 −10.10 V _______ −9.90 V

Output Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX OUT 4 −10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 −5.05 V _______ −4.95 V

10.000 −10.10 V _______ −9.90 V

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX IN 1 −10.000 -10.10 V _______ -9.90 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 -5.05 V _______ -4.95 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
200 Performance Test Record Appendix G

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX IN 2 −10.000 -10.10 V _______ -9.90 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 -5.05 V _______ -4.95 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX IN 3 −10.000 -10.10 V _______ -9.90 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 -5.05 V _______ -4.95 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Input Voltage Lower Limit Reading

AUX IN 4 −10.000 -10.10 V _______ -9.90 V

Upper Limit

−5.000 -5.05 V _______ -4.95 V

0.000 −0.010 V _______ 0.010 V

5.000 4.95 V _______ 5.05 V

10.000 9.90 V _______ 10.10 V

Input Noise 

Frequency Input Range Sensitivity Reading

1 kHz 100 nV 100 nV _______ 5.6 nV (*)

Upper Limit

(*) noise limit corresponds to 5 nV/√Hz, with time constant filter ENBW=1.25 Hz.

Test Record sheet 4 of 4

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Circuit Description 201

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Appendix H 

Circuit Description

This appendix provides a brief orientation to the signal interface and power supply 

portions of the SR865 electronics. The FPGA-based motherboard is beyond the scope of 

this documentation, and servicing or other detailed hardware questions should be referred 

to the factory.

Signal Input Amplifier

The SR865 signal input module contains both the differential voltage preamplifier and 

the current input preamplifier. Steering relays set the input configuration, including 

grounding, ac coupling, and differential or single ended mode. Most relays are of the 

latching type, requiring only a short pulse to switch states. Relays K102 and K106 are 

single-side stable, however, and are (separately) energized to select the voltage 

preamplifier or current preamplifier, respectively. In the de-energized state, these relays 

keep the sensitive amplifier front-end components isolated from the front panel input 

connections.

The voltage input preamplifier uses a cascaded JFET input stage with transistors Q202 

and Q101, with feedback provided by U202 and resistors R223, R224, and R225, R226, 

R230, R231. The current input preamplifier is built with transimpedance gain of 106 V/A 

or 108 V/A (R305 or R302). dc offset voltage trim is injected at the fully differential 

summing junctions for U204, which also provides CMRR trimming for the voltage 

preamp front-end. Programmable gain blocks around U402 and U404 implement the 

SR865 Input Range setting, with U406 driving the rear panel Signal Mon after all 

programmable gain is added. The main analog signal is driven differentially through 

R428 and R429 to the shielded twisted pair interconnect J401 leading to the motherboard.

Level translators U501A, U502A, U503A, and U504A support overload window 

comparator circuits, while the differentiators U501B, U502B, and U503B allow for slew 

rate overload detection. U601 through U603 all perform overload detection, wire-or’ing 

into buffer U611/U610 for monitoring by the motherboard. Chip selects, clock gating, 

and relay control is implemented with U701–U709. Analog power for the signal 

amplifiers is re-regulated from the main power supply ±16V to ±15V with U710/U711 

low noise, low drop-out regulators.

External Reference Input

The reference input module provides signal conditioning for sine and TTL mode external 

reference inputs for the digital phase-locked loop of the SR865. Input impedance and 

signal type (sine or TTL) is selected by steering relays K101 and K102, and analog 

switch U108. The TTL path is dc coupled and discriminated directly with comparator 

U102, with transition threshold set at +1V. The polarity (rising or falling edge) is selected 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
202 Circuit Description Appendix H

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

by U104. The sine path is ac coupled with a 1 s time constant at C117/R132, and buffered 

by U106. Threshold trimming from U115 is added through R192 before further 

amplification at U105 and discrimination at U112. The logic-level reference is then 

converted into a fast differential transition using current-mode logic from U109, and then 

level-shifted and slew-rate limited with U102 before being driven differentially through 

R105, R108 to the shielded twisted pair interconnect J101 leading to the motherboard.

Chip selects, clock gating, and relay control is provided by U201 through U206. dc

power is re-regulated from ±16V to ±5V with linear regulators U207 and U208.

Sine Output

The SR865 sine output module provides filtering, attenuation, and dc level generation for 

the differential sine output. A passive 7th order differential Cauer low pass filter is 

implemented with components L102–L107, C101–C107, C112–C114. The signal is 

amplified by U101 (and optionally U102) before being launched through R109–R116 as 

a 100Ω impedance differential signal. Programmable attenuators are switched in or out 

using steering relays K102–K109. The dc level control is generated by DAC U105 and 

amplifier U106, and then driven with 100Ω impedance either directly or through an 

attenuator divider selected by K110.

The ac signal is then wire-added to the 100Ω impedance dc level to create 50Ω 

impedance signals at the output BNCs. Chip selects, clock gating, and relay control is 

implemented with U201–U711. All power rails for the circuit board are re-regulated from 

the main power supply ±16V to ±15V and +5V with U212–U214 linear regulators.

Auxiliary I/O

The rear-panel auxiliary I/O circuit supports the 4 AUX OUT and 4 AUX IN analog 

signals. Outputs are received differentially (referenced to system ground) from the 

motherboard on header J1, through difference amplifier circuits U1A–U1D. Analog 

inputs are buffered with amplifiers U1A–U1D, and presenting 1 MΩ input impedances.

The TTL compatible TRIG IN signal is also on this board, but separately interconnected 

to the motherboard via J11.

Linear Power Supply

The SR865 uses a low noise linear power supply. A multi-tap “universal primary” 

toroidal transformer can be configured at the power entry module for either 100VAC, 

120VAC, 220VAC, or 240VAC. Multiple secondary windings, most of which are centertapped, provide dedicated power to all sections of the instrument. Multiple independent 

grounds are left isolated from each other within the power supply to avoid creating 

ground loops; each circuit, however, is ultimately ground referenced to chassis ground. 

Bridge rectifiers on the lower power supply board convert 50 Hz / 60 Hz to dc; some of 

these components (particularly D6) run quite hot under normal conditions. Unregulated 

dc power is routed up from the rectifier board to the upper (regulator) board by the 20-pin 

header J2 located near the rear panel of the SR865.

Linear regulators on the upper power supply board establish the voltage rails for 

distribution across the instrument. Most regulators are clamped onto the channel heat sink 

on the center of the board. Please note that the DB-9 connections for the Reference In 

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
Appendix H Circuit Description 203

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

module (J6) and the Sine Out module (J8) are not interchangeable — these subassemblies

have different power requirements and must be cabled correctly. 24 VDC is tapped from 

the motherboard connector to header J9 for powering the small cooling fan mounted to 

the heat sink. Serial SPI control signals are routed from the motherboard to each frontend module (Preamp, Ref In, and Sine Out) through the regulator board; signals come in 

via J7, and are bussed to pins 4, 5, 8, and 9 of the power/control connectors J2, J6, and J8.

While each set of related voltage rails has a separate ground network, all of these grounds 

are loosely tied to chassis ground through resistors R31–R36 (10 kΩ each) to avoid any 

supplies “drifting away” during testing before connection to their loads. Probing of the 

output voltage levels is best accomplished from test point array TP1–TP20; these test 

points are protected through 4.7 kΩ resistors to avoid arcing if accidentally shorted.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
204 Circuit Description Appendix H

SR865 DSP Lock-in Amplifier

Partial schematics follow this page.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine